UDA2182

Universal Dual Analyzer

Product Manual

70-82-25-119
January 2009

Honeywell Process Solutions

 Notices and Trademarks

Copyright 2008 by Honeywell

Revision 5 January 2009

WARRANTY/REMEDY
Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective materials and faulty
workmanship. Contact your local sales office for warranty information. If warranted goods are
returned to Honeywell during the period of coverage, Honeywell will repair or replace without charge
those items it finds defective. The foregoing is Buyer's sole remedy and is in lieu of all other
warranties, expressed or implied, including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose. Specifications may change without notice. The information we supply is believed to be
accurate and reliable as of this printing. However, we assume no responsibility for its use.

While we provide application assistance personally, through our literature and the Honeywell web
site, it is up to the customer to determine the suitability of the product in the application.

Honeywell Process Solutions

Honeywell
2500 W. Union Hill Drive
Phoenix, Arizona 85027
UDA2182 is a U.S. registered trademark of Honeywell

Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

ii UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 About This Document

Abstract
This document provides descriptions and procedures for the Installation, Configuration, Operation, and Troubleshooting of
your UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer.

Contacts
World Wide Web
The following lists Honeywell’s World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our customers.

Honeywell Organization WWW Address (URL)

Corporate [Link]

Honeywell Field Solutions [Link]

Technical tips [Link]

Telephone
Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below.

Organization Phone Number

United States and Canada Honeywell 1-800-423-9883 Tech. Support

1-800-525-7439 Service

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual iii

Symbol Definitions
The following table lists those symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions.

Symbol Definition

This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers you to the Product Manual for
additional information. This symbol appears next to required information in the manual.

WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY: Risk of electrical shock. This symbol warns you of a potential
shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak,
or 60 VDC may be accessible. Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.

ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for

handling electrostatic sensitive devices

Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Provided for connection of the protective earth (green
or green/yellow) supply system conductor.

Functional earth terminal. Used for non-safety purposes such as noise immunity
improvement. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to protective earth at the source
of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements.

Earth Ground. Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to
Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical
code requirements.

Chassis Ground. Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment shall
be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and
local electrical code requirements.

iv UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Contents

1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................1
1.2 Features ...........................................................................................................................................3

2 SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................. 5
2.1 Specifications..................................................................................................................................5
2.2 CE Conformity (Europe).................................................................................................................7

3 UNPACKING, PREPARATION, AND MOUNTING ............................................... 9

3.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................9
3.2 Unpacking and Preparing..............................................................................................................10
3.3 Mounting.......................................................................................................................................10

4 POWER WIRING ................................................................................................. 15

4.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................15
4.2 General Wiring Practices ..............................................................................................................16
4.3 Power Wiring Considerations .......................................................................................................17
4.4 Installing Power Wiring ................................................................................................................17

5 OPERATING THE ANALYZER ........................................................................... 20

5.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................20
5.2 Analyzer Overview .......................................................................................................................21
5.3 Key Navigation .............................................................................................................................22
5.4 Displays Overview........................................................................................................................23
5.5 Input Displays ...............................................................................................................................25
5.6 PID Displays .................................................................................................................................26
5.7 Auto Cycle Displays .....................................................................................................................28
5.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................................28
5.7.2 Access to Auto Cycle Displays ..........................................................................................28
5.7.3 How it works......................................................................................................................29
5.7.4 Displays..............................................................................................................................29
5.7.5 Hold Active ........................................................................................................................30
5.7.6 Probe Transit ......................................................................................................................30
5.7.7 Cycle Start Src ...................................................................................................................30
5.7.8 Cycle Interval.....................................................................................................................30
5.7.9 Rinse Cycle Cnt .................................................................................................................30
5.7.10 Rinse Mins......................................................................................................................30
5.7.11 Resume Dly Mins ...........................................................................................................30

3/08 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual v

 5.7.12 Manual Starting/Stopping the Auto Cycle .....................................................................31
5.7.13 Auto Cycle Fail ..............................................................................................................32
5.7.14 Conditional Sequencer Steps..........................................................................................32
5.8 Pharma Display .............................................................................................................................33
5.8.1 Overview............................................................................................................................33
5.8.2 How it works......................................................................................................................33
5.8.3 Access to Pharma Display..................................................................................................34
5.8.4 Displays..............................................................................................................................34
5.8.5 Pharma Warning and Fail Signal .......................................................................................36
5.9 Cation Calc Display ......................................................................................................................37
5.9.1 Overview............................................................................................................................37
5.9.2 How it works......................................................................................................................37
5.9.3 pH Calculation from Specific and Cation Conductivity Setup ..........................................38
5.9.4 Calibration..........................................................................................................................39
5.9.5 CO2 by Degassed Conductivity..........................................................................................39
5.9.6 Access to Cation Display ...................................................................................................39
5.9.7 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................40
5.10 Status Display............................................................................................................................41
5.11 Event History.............................................................................................................................46
5.12 Process Instrument Explorer Software ......................................................................................48
5.13 Modbus Communications..........................................................................................................50

6 CONFIGURATION............................................................................................... 51
6.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................51
6.2 UDA2182 Block Diagram ............................................................................................................52
6.3 Main Setup Menu..........................................................................................................................53
6.4 Basic Configuration Procedure .....................................................................................................55
6.4.1 General Rules for Editing...................................................................................................55
6.5 Analog and Digital Signal Sources ...............................................................................................58
6.6 Inputs Configuration .....................................................................................................................63
6.7 Outputs Configuration ..................................................................................................................74
6.8 Relays Configuration ....................................................................................................................76
6.9 Alarms Configuration ...................................................................................................................81
6.10 Monitors Configuration.............................................................................................................83
6.11 Math Configuration ...................................................................................................................85
6.12 Logic Configuration ..................................................................................................................87
6.13 Auxiliary Configuration ............................................................................................................89
6.14 PID Control Configuration........................................................................................................92
6.15 Auto Cycling Configuration....................................................................................................100
6.15.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................100
6.15.2 Accessing Auto Cycle Menu ........................................................................................100
6.15.3 Auto Cycling Configuration .........................................................................................101
6.15.4 pH Auto Cycling Configuration Example ....................................................................103

vi UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 6.16 Variables Configuration ..........................................................................................................105
6.17 Communication Configuration................................................................................................106
6.18 Maintenance Configuration.....................................................................................................108

7 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS WIRING..................................................................... 114

7.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................114
7.2 General Wiring Practices ............................................................................................................115
7.3 Inputs and Outputs ......................................................................................................................117
7.4 Direct pH/ORP Input Wiring Diagrams......................................................................................120
7.5 pH Input from External Preamplifier/Cap Adapter Wiring Diagrams ........................................126
7.6 Conductivity................................................................................................................................130
7.7 Dissolved Oxygen.......................................................................................................................131
7.8 Communications Card.................................................................................................................133
7.9 Outputs........................................................................................................................................134
7.10 Option Card .............................................................................................................................135

8 INPUT CALIBRATION....................................................................................... 136

8.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................136
8.2 Calibration Menu ........................................................................................................................137
8.3 pH/ORP and Conductivity Overview .........................................................................................138
8.4 Recommendations for Successful Measurement and Calibration...............................................139
8.5 pH Calibration.............................................................................................................................140
8.5.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................140
8.5.2 Calibrating pH Electrodes Using Automatic Buffer recognition .....................................141
8.5.3 Buffering Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes..............................................................145
8.5.4 Sample Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes .................................................................148
8.5.5 Viewing and resetting pH Offset and (Standardization) pH Slope ..................................150
8.6 ORP Calibration..........................................................................................................................151
8.6.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................151
8.6.2 ORP Calibration Using Reference Solution.....................................................................151
8.6.3 ORP Calibration Using Voltage Input .............................................................................154
8.6.4 Viewing and Resetting ORP Offset .................................................................................156
8.7 Conductivity Calibration.............................................................................................................157
8.7.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................157
8.7.2 Entering the Cal Factor for each cell................................................................................157
8.7.3 Determining and Entering the TDS Conversion Factor ...................................................157
8.7.4 Determining TDS conversion factor ................................................................................158
8.7.5 Performing Calibration Trim............................................................................................159
8.7.6 Resetting Calibration Trim...............................................................................................162
8.7.7 Cation pH Calibration ......................................................................................................163
8.7.8 Resetting pH Offset..........................................................................................................165
8.8 Dissolved Oxygen Calibration ....................................................................................................166

3/08 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual vii

9 OUTPUTS CALIBRATION ................................................................................ 178
9.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................178
9.2 Output Calibration ......................................................................................................................179

10 TEMPERATURE INPUT CALIBRATION .......................................................... 185

10.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................185
10.2 Temperature Input Calibration ................................................................................................186

11 CALIBRATION HISTORY ................................................................................. 189

11.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................189
11.2 Clear Calibration History ........................................................................................................190

12 DIAGNOSTICS AND MESSAGES .................................................................... 191

12.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................191
12.2 System Status Messages ..........................................................................................................192
12.3 Calibration Diagnostics ...........................................................................................................193
12.4 Auto Cycle Fail Messages.......................................................................................................194
12.5 Pharma Fail Messages .............................................................................................................195

13 ETHERNET AND COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................ 196

13.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................196

14 ACCESSORIES AND REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ...................................... 197

14.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................197
14.2 Part Numbers...........................................................................................................................198

15 APPENDICES.................................................................................................... 199
15.1 Table of Contents ....................................................................................................................199
15.2 Appendix A – Entering Values for Lead Resistance Compensation.......................................200
15.3 Appendix B – Entering Values for Lead Resistance Compensation [Titanium Cells]............202
15.4 Appendix C - Cyanide Waste Treatment.................................................................................204
15.5 Appendix D – Chrome Waste Treatment ................................................................................208
15.6 Appendix E – Two-cell Applications ......................................................................................212
15.7 Appendix F – Using a Precision Check Resistor (For Conductivity) ....................................216
15.8 Appendix G – Noise Testing, Dissolved Oxygen Application................................................218
15.9 Appendix H – DO Probe and Analyzer Tests .........................................................................219
15.10 Appendix I – Parameters Affecting Dissolved Oxygen Measurement ................................222
15.11 Appendix J – Discussion on Chemical Interferences on Measured DO Currents ...............223
15.12 Appendix K – Percent Saturation Readout ..........................................................................225

viii UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 15.13 Appendix L – Leak Detection in PPB Applications ............................................................226
15.14 Appendix M – Procedure for Low Level ppb Dissolved Oxygen Testing ..........................227
15.15 Appendix N – Sample Tap Electrode Mounting Recommendations...................................229
15.16 Appendix O – Auto Clean and Auto Cal Examples ............................................................231
15.17 Appendix P – AutoClean and AutoCal Theory and Piping .................................................234
15.17.1 AutoCal Sequence and Piping ......................................................................................235

INDEX..........................................................................................................................239

3/08 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual ix

 Tables
Table 3-1 Procedure for Unpacking and Preparing the UDA2182 ______________________________ 10
Table 3-2 Panel Mounting Procedure ____________________________________________________ 11
Table 4-1 Procedure for installing AC Power Wiring ________________________________________ 17
Table 5-1 Function of Keys____________________________________________________________ 22
Table 5-2 Display Details Functions _____________________________________________________ 24
Table 5-3 Changing PID Parameters on the Display_________________________________________ 27
Table 5-4 Manually Starting/Stopping the Auto Cycle _______________________________________ 31
Table 5-5 Conditional Sequencer Steps for Auto Cycle ______________________________________ 32
Table 5-6 Selecting the Pharma Test on Display ___________________________________________ 35
Table 5-7 Status Display Details ________________________________________________________ 41
Table 6-1 Basic Configuration Procedure _________________________________________________ 56
Table 6-2 Signal Sources______________________________________________________________ 58
Table 6-3 Analog Signal Sources _______________________________________________________ 59
Table 6-4 Digital Signal Sources________________________________________________________ 60
Table 6-5 Input Configuration__________________________________________________________ 63
Table 6-6 Outputs Configuration________________________________________________________ 74
Table 6-7 Relays Configuration ________________________________________________________ 77
Table 6-8 Alarms Configuration ________________________________________________________ 82
Table 6-9 Monitors Configuration_______________________________________________________ 83
Table 6-10 Math Configuration_________________________________________________________ 86
Table 6-11 Logic Configuration ________________________________________________________ 88
Table 6-12 Auxiliary Configuration _____________________________________________________ 90
Table 6-13 PID Configuration__________________________________________________________ 94
Table 6-14 PID Tuning _______________________________________________________________ 97
Table 6-15 PID Alarms _______________________________________________________________ 98
Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration _________________________________________________ 101
Table 6-17 Example Auto Cycling Configuration for pH____________________________________ 103
Table 6-18 Variables Configuration ____________________________________________________ 105
Table 6-19 Communication Configuration _______________________________________________ 106
Table 6-20 Maintenance Configuration__________________________________________________ 108
Table 7-1 Recommended Maximum Wire Size ___________________________________________ 116
Table 7-2 Procedure for installing Input and Output wiring __________________________________ 119
Table 8-1 Standard pH Buffer Values ___________________________________________________ 142
Table 8-2 Calibrating pH Electrodes Using Automatic Buffer Recognition______________________ 143
Table 8-3 Procedure for Buffering Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes _______________________ 146
Table 8-4 Procedure for Sample Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes _________________________ 148
Table 8-5 Oxidation-Reduction Potential of Reference Solutions at Specified Temperature ________ 152
Table 8-6 Procedure for Calibrating ORP System Using a Reference Solution ___________________ 152
Table 8-7 Procedure for Calibrating ORP Analyzer Using Voltage Input _______________________ 154
Table 8-8 Conductivity of Potassium Chloride Solutions at 25 °C_____________________________ 160
Table 8-9 Procedure for Performing Calibration Trim Using a Reference Solution________________ 160
Table 8-10 Procedure for Sample Method of Calibrating Cation pH ___________________________ 163
Table 8-11 Calibrating a Dissolved Oxygen Probe Using Air Calibration Method ________________ 167
Table 8-12 Calibrating a Dissolved Oxygen Probe Using Sample Calibration Method _____________ 169
Table 8-13 Calibrating the Integral Pressure Sensor ________________________________________ 171
Table 8-14 Running a Probe Bias Scan __________________________________________________ 174
Table 9-1 Procedure for Calibrating Analyzer Outputs______________________________________ 181
Table 10-1 Procedure for Calibrating the Temperature Inputs ________________________________ 186

x UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

Table 11-1 Cal History items _________________________________________________________ 189
Table 12-1 Status Messages __________________________________________________________ 192
Table 12-2 Probe Calibration Diagnostics________________________________________________ 193
Table 12-3 Auto Cycle Fail Messages___________________________________________________ 194
Table 12-4 Pharma Fail Messages______________________________________________________ 195
Table 14-1 Part Numbers_____________________________________________________________ 198
Table 15-1 Data for Concentration Range Measurements ___________________________________ 217
Table 15-2 Dissolved Oxygen Solubility vs. Temperature ___________________________________ 225

Figures
Figure 3-1 Panel Mounting Dimensions (not to scale) _______________________________________ 11
Figure 3-2 Rear Panel Support Plate Dimensions ___________________________________________ 12
Figure 3-3 Pipe Mounting Dimensions (not to scale) ________________________________________ 13
Figure 3-4 Wall Mounting Dimensions (not to scale)________________________________________ 14
Figure 4-1 Power Wiring______________________________________________________________ 19
Figure 5-1 UDA2182 Operator Interface (all display items shown) _____________________________ 21
Figure 5-2 Example – Two Input Display _________________________________________________ 25
Figure 5-3 PID Loop 1 Edit Display screen example ________________________________________ 26
Figure 5-4 Auto Cycle Display screen example ____________________________________________ 28
Figure 5-5 Pharma Display screen example _______________________________________________ 34
Figure 5-6 UDA for Cation and Degassed CO2_____________________________________________ 37
Figure 5-7 Cation Display screen example for pH calculations ________________________________ 39
Figure 5-8 Status Display screen example ________________________________________________ 41
Figure 5-9 Event History Display screen example __________________________________________ 46
Figure 5-10 Alarm Event Display screen example (Read Only) ________________________________ 46
Figure 5-11 Screen capture of Process Instrument Explorer running on a Pocket PC _______________ 48
Figure 6-1 UDA2182 Block Diagram ____________________________________________________ 52
Figure 7-1 Wiring Terminals and board Location__________________________________________ 118
Figure 7-2 Terminal Designations for Durafet III Electrode__________________________________ 120
Figure 7-3 Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode __________________________________ 121
Figure 7-4 Terminal Designations for Meredian II Electrode _________________________________ 122
Figure 7-5 Terminal Designations for Meredian II Electrode with Quick Disconnect ______________ 122
Figure 7-6 Terminal Designations for ORP ______________________________________________ 123
Figure 7-7 Terminal Designations for Direct pH/ORP with Quick Disconnect Option_____________ 123
Figure 7-8 Terminal Designations for HPW7000 System____________________________________ 124
Figure 7-9 Terminal Designations for HB Series pH or ORP _________________________________ 125
Figure 7-10 Terminal Designations for Meredian Electrode with External Preamplifier ____________ 126
Figure 7-11 Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode with External Preamplifier____________ 127
Figure 7-12 Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode with Cap Adapter___________________ 128
Figure 7-13 Terminal Designations for Durafet III Electrode with Cap Adapter __________________ 129
Figure 7-14 Terminal Designations for Conductivity with Integral Cable _______________________ 130
Figure 7-15 Terminal Designations for Conductivity Cells with Quick Disconnect _______________ 130
Figure 7-16 Terminal Designations for Dissolved Oxygen with Integral Cable___________________ 131
Figure 7-17 Terminal Designations for Dissolved Oxygen with Quick Disconnect Option _________ 132
Figure 7-18 Terminal Designations for Communications Card _______________________________ 133
Figure 7-19 Terminal Designations for Power, Analog Output, and Relay Output ________________ 134
Figure 7-20 Terminal Designations for Option Board ______________________________________ 135
Figure 8-1 Resetting pH Offset and pH Slope_____________________________________________ 150

3/08 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual xi

Figure 8-2 Resetting ORP Offset ______________________________________________________ 156
Figure 8-3 Resetting Calibration Trim __________________________________________________ 162
Figure 8-4 Resetting pH Offset ________________________________________________________ 165
Figure 8-5 Display of Probe Bias Test Done in Air ________________________________________ 173
Figure 8-6 Resetting Pressure Offset or Bias Volts_________________________________________ 177
Figure 9-1 Resetting Output 1 Offsets (example) __________________________________________ 184
Figure 10-1 Resetting temperature offset ________________________________________________ 188
Figure 15-1 Example of a Conductivity Loop_____________________________________________ 200
Figure 15-2 Example of a Conductivity Loop_____________________________________________ 202
Figure 15-3 Cyanide Treatment System _________________________________________________ 204
Figure 15-4 First Stage Cyanide Oxidation - Typical Titration Curve __________________________ 205
Figure 15-5 Chrome Treatment System _________________________________________________ 208
Figure 15-6 Chrome Reduction - Typical Titration Curve ___________________________________ 209
Figure 15-7 Suggested ppb Dissolved Oxygen Test Set-up __________________________________ 228
Figure 15-8 Typical Probe Installation __________________________________________________ 229
Figure 15-9 Auto Clean Setup_________________________________________________________ 232
Figure 15-10 Auto Cal Setup__________________________________________________________ 233
Figure 15-11 Automatic Electrode Wash Setup __________________________________________ 235
Figure 15-12 Rinse and One-Point Calibration ____________________________________________ 236
Figure 15-13 Two-Point AutoCal Operation______________________________________________ 237

xii UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Introduction

1 Introduction

1.1 Overview
Multi-function instrument
The UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer is the next level of dual channel analyzers
providing unprecedented versatility and flexibility.
The UDA2182 can accept single or dual inputs from Honeywell Direct pH, pH from
preamp, ORP (Oxidation Reduction Potential), Contacting Conductivity and Dissolved
Oxygen sensors. Measurements for Dual channel units can be arranged in any
combination of measurement.

User interface
“Process Information at a Glance” is a unique feature of the UDA2182 graphical
backlit LCD.
Two PV values with corresponding UOM (unit of measure), temperature, alarm state,
scales, and limits, tagging, and status messages can be displayed simultaneously.
Ten dedicated keys provide direct access to Setup configuration menus and sub-menus
and Calibration.

Easy to configure
Menu-driven configuration of the UDA2182 is intuitive, fast and easy. A Setup menu is
provided for every configuration task. You will be permitted to configure only those
parameters relevant to your application and supported by the Analyzer model you
purchased.
In fact, Setup configuration screens will contain only prompts and menu choices that
apply to your application.
Multi-language prompts guide the operator step-by-step through the configuration
process assuring quick and accurate entry of all configurable parameters. Nine languages
are available via configuration: English, French, German, Spanish, Italian, Russian,
Turkish, Polish and Czech.

Inputs
Analytical measurements of Direct pH, pH from preamp, ORP, Conductivity and
Dissolved Oxygen (ppm or ppb) can all be done in one analyzer. The unit can be used as
a single input or dual input instrument – you decide what measurements are included.
The input boards are factory calibrated and easily replaced. Addition of additional relays
or an analog output is done with a single board. The “Mix –n- Match” design reduces
inventory and increases flexibility. You can purchase a basic unit and then add input and
output boards as needed.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 1

Introduction

Outputs
Two standard Analog outputs 0 –20 or 4–20 mAdc, 750 ohms maximum, isolated from
inputs, ground, and each other, and independently assignable to any parameters and
ranges Proportional to user-set output range(s) of selected parameter(s).
One optional Analog output 0 –20 or 4–20 mAdc, 750 ohms maximum, isolated from
inputs, ground, and each other, and independently assignable to any parameters and
ranges.

Relays
Two 4A SPDT alarm/control relays are standard; with an additional two 4A relays
available as an option.

Infrared Communications
The infrared connection provides a non-intrusive wireless connection with the instrument
and maintains its weather tight integrity when combined with the optional PIE (Process
Instrument Explorer).
No need to get access to the back of the analyzer to communicate with the instrument, no
need to take your screw driver to wire the communication cable, no wiring mistake
possible. You can now duplicate an instrument’s configuration, upload or download a
new configuration in a matter of seconds, just by pointing your Pocket PC in the direction
of the instrument.

Communications Card (Optional)

The Communication card provides one Serial Port and one Ethernet Port.
Serial port provides
RS422/RS485 multi-drop
Modbus RTU protocol to read signals and read/write variables
Ethernet port provides:
Multi-language web pages to monitor readings, alarms, statuses, events
Multi-language web pages to setup Ethernet port settings
Multi-language email to send alarm status changes
Modbus TCP protocol to read signals and read/write variables
Both ports can communicate to a PIE tool

2 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Introduction

1.2 Features
Standard and solution temperature compensation
Measured pH temperature is compensated in one of two ways. Electrode temperature
sensitivity is automatically compensated to display the correct pH value at temperature.
In addition, displayed pH can be optionally normalized to a solution temperature of 25°C
as determined by the current Solution Temperature Coefficient, which is expressed in
units of pH/°C with precision to the hundredths decimal place. The parameter “Solu
Temp Coeff” allows the selection of Pure Water, Ammonia, Phosphate, Morpholine, and
Custom or None (User Entry).
Measured Conductivity and Resistivity can optionally be temperature compensated to
25°C for a specific solution type. TDS and concentration are always measured based on a
specific solution type. The cell constant and measurement type determines which solution
types are available for selection.
Dissolved Oxygen accurately measures the concentration of dissolved oxygen in water.
The Analyzer energizes the probe and receives dissolved oxygen and temperature signals.
Optional salinity compensation is provided. The Analyzer provides for Air or Sample
calibration with ambient temperature and atmospheric pressure compensation.

Calculated pH
High purity water pH can be calculated from Specific and Cation conductivities to be
used as a check on in-line high purity water pH measurements.

Automatic buffer recognition

“Buffer Group” types NIST/USP, USA, or Europe determines the set of standard pH
buffer values to be used for Zero and Slope calibration by automatic buffer recognition.
Each of the available Buffer Groups is a set of 5 or 6 pH buffer standards.

Solution Temperature Compensation

For high purity water measurement you can select pre-set compensations or configure
custom values.

USP26 Alarm Capabilities

Relays can be configured to alarm on conductivity values as determined by the USP26
standards.

Computed Variables
The availability of calculated variables in the list of available sources for alarms, math
and control and for status display is determined by similarity of units of measure between
the two input boards. For example with Dual Conductivity, %Rejection/Passage,
Difference, or Ratio can be displayed and assigned to the outputs or alarms.
CO2 concentration in ppm can be calculated from de-gassed conductivity measurement.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 3

Introduction

Password protection
Keyboard security protects configuration and calibration data. A password (up to four
digits) can be configured. If the security feature is enabled, the password will be required
to access configuration and calibration software functions.

Auto Clean/Auto Cal

Built-in real time clock is used to set-up versatile cycles that can be used to initiate
automatic sensor cleaning and then calibration.

Diagnostic/Failsafe Outputs
Continuous diagnostic routines detect failure modes, trigger a failsafe output value and
identify the failure to minimize troubleshooting time. The UDA2182 Analyzer performs
extensive self-diagnostics as a background task during normal operation. If a problem is
detected, a message is displayed on the Message stripe to alert the operator. In addition,
the operator can initiate keypad and display tests using Maintenance Menu functions.

High Noise Immunity

The analyzer is designed to provide reliable, error-free performance in industrial
environments that often affect highly noise-sensitive digital equipment.

Watertight corrosion-resistant case

CSA Type 4X (NEMA 4X) rated enclosure permits use in applications where it may be
subjected to moisture, dust, or hose-down conditions. The UDA2182 is designed for
panel, pipe or wall mounting.

4 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Specifications

2 Specifications
2.1 Specifications
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer
Display Graphical LCD with white LED Backlight
Viewing Area: 66.8 mm (W) X 35.5 mm (H)
Dot Pixels: 128 (W) X 64 (H)
Display Ranges pH:
0-14 pH
Temperature: -10 to 110°C (14 to 230°F)
ORP:
-1600 to +1600 mV
Conductivity:
0.01 Cell: 0-2 uS/cm displayable to 200 uS/cm; 0-0.2 mS/cm;
0-2,000 ppb TDS; 0-200 ppm TDS
0.1 Cell: 0-20 uS/cm displayable to 2000 uS/cm; 0-2 mS/cm,
0-2,000 ppb TDS; 0-2,000 ppm TDS,
1.0 Cell: 0-200 uS/cm displayable to 20,000 uS/cm; 0-20 mS/cm;
0-200 ppm TDS; 0-20 ppt TDS
10 Cell: 0-2,000 uS/cm displayable to 99999 uS/cm; 0-200 mS/cm;
0-2,000 ppm TDS; 0-200 ppt TDS
25 Cell: 0-20,000 uS/cm displayable to 99999 uS/cm; 0-500 mS/cm;
0-10% Concentration displayable to 20%
50 Cell: 0-20,000 uS/cm displayable to 99999 uS/cm; 0-1,000 mS/cm;
0-20% Concentration
Temperature: 0 to + 140°C (32 to 284°F)
Dissolved Oxygen:
0 - 20 ppm
0 –200 ppb, displayable to 20000 ppb
0 – 100% saturation, displayable to 200% saturation
Temperature: 2 – 60°C (35.6 – 104°F), must not freeze
Keypad 10 Button Membrane Switch w/Directional Functionality
UV/Solvent/Abrasion Resistant
®
Case Material GE Valox 357 (un-reinforced thermoplastic polyester)
Performances (Under Accuracy: 0.5% of reading
reference operating Output Accuracy: +/- 0.01 mA
conditions) Drift: Negligible
Repeatability: 0.05%
Temperature Accuracy:
pH and Conductivity Thermistor: +/- 0.1°C from –10 to 100° C, +/- 1.0° C from 101° to 140° C
pH 1000 ohm RTD: +/- 0.4° C
D.O. Thermistor: +/- 0.1° C from 0 to 60° C
Reference Operating Conditions: 25 +/- 1° C; 10-40% RH; 120 or 240 Vac
Operating Conditions Ambient Temperature
Operating: 0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F)
Storage: -30 to 70°C (-22 to 158°F)
RH: 5 to 90% max. Non-condensing up to 40°C (104°F). For higher temperatures the RH specification
is derated to maintain constant moisture content
Vibration:
5-15 Hz disp 8 mm pk to pk
15-200 Hz accel 2G
Standard Analog Output Two 0-20 mAdc or 4-20 mAdc, 750 ohms max., isolated from inputs, ground, and each other,
Independently field-assignable to any parameters and ranges.
Proportional to user-set output range(s) of selected parameter(s),
Optional Analog Output One 0-20 mAdc or 4-20 mAdc, 750 ohms max., isolated from inputs, ground, and each other.
Independently field-assignable to any parameters and ranges

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 5

Specifications

UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer

Control Loop/Outputs Control Loops: 2 standard (one for each PV); current, pulse frequency, or time proportional
Control Loop Types: PID (optional), Duplex (optional), On/Off (standard)
Auto-tuning: Accutune II, fuzzy logic overshoot suppression, applicable to both PID loops
Standard Alarm/ Control Two SPDT (Form “C”) Relays
Relays Resistive Load Rating: 4A, 120/240 Vac
Optional Additional Two SPDT (Form “C”) Relays
Alarm/Control Relays Resistive Load Rating: 4A, 120/240 Vac
Alarm/Control Settings Alarm/on-off control delay: 0-100 seconds.
Alarm/on-off control deadbands: individually set, from 1 count to full scale for pH, ORP, and
temperature.
On/off cycle period: 0 to 1000 seconds.
On/off percent “on” time: 0 to 100%, 1% resolution.
Set point and proportional band limit ranges: ±19.99 pH, ±1999 mV, -10 to 130°C, 1 count resolution.
DAT cycle period: 1 to 1999 seconds.
PFT maximum frequency: 1 to 200 pulses/minute.
PFT pulse width: 50 ms, compatible with electronic pulse-type metering pumps.
Remote Preamplifier Input Optional input card to accept input signal from Honeywell digital preamplifiers:
Option Meridian II – 31075707 and 31022283
Durafet – 31079288 and Cap Adapter cables
pH Temperature Conventional compensation for changing electrode output (Nernst response), plus selectable solution
Compensation temperature compensation for high-purity water.
Calculated pH from User selectable when unit has two Conductivity inputs. Used when ammonia or amine is the water
Differential Conductivity treatment chemical.
Auto Buffer Recognition User Selectable
(pH) Available Buffer Series: NIST/USP, US, and Euro
Conductivity NaCl, HCl, H2SO4, PO4, NaOH, NH3, C4H9C, Pure Water, Custom (User Selectable)
Compensations
Dissolved Oxygen Max flowrate (probe): 950 ml/min with flow chamber; no dependence on stirring or flowrate
Measurement Atmospheric pressure: 500-800 mm Hg with internal sensor, for calibration
Calibration with either Air or Sample
Auto Clean/ Auto Cal Real time clock is used to set-up cycles to initiate a cleaning and calibration sequence. Cycle Set-up is
Function user configurable.
Event History Screen Event history screen stores 256 events with a description of the event and a Date/time stamp.
Calibration History Screen Calibration history screen stores information on 128 calibration events with a date/time stamp.
2
Power Requirements 90 -264 Vac, 47-63 Hz, 15 VA. Memory retained by E PROM when power is off.
Wireless Interface Type: Infrared (IR)
Length of Link: 0 –1 M, 0 –15° Offset
Baud Rate: 9600
Data Format: Modbus Protocol
RS422/RS485 Modbus Baud Rate: 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 selectable
RTU Slave Data Format:: IEEE floating point and 32-bit integer. Word swap configurable.
Communications Interface Length of Link:
(Optional)
2000 ft (600 m) max. with Belden 9271 Twinax Cable and 120 ohm termination resistors
4000 ft (1200 m) max. with Belden 8227 Twinax Cable and 100 ohm termination resistors
Link Characteristics: Two-wire (half-duplex), multi-drop Modbus RTU protocol, 15 drops maximum or
up to 31 drops for shorter link length.
Modbus RTU slave: Provides monitoring of inputs outputs, statuses, alarms, and variables. Provides
writing of variables for remotely modifying parameter settings.

6 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Specifications

UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer

Ethernet TCP/IP Type: 10 or 100 BaseT; auto-speed and auto-polarity sensing
Communications Interface Length of Link: 330 ft. (100 m) maximum. Use Shielded twisted-pair, Category 5 (STP CAT5) Ethernet
(Optional) cable.
Link Characteristics: Four-wire plus shield, single drop, five hops maximum
IP Address: IP Address is [Link] as shipped from the factory
Recommended network configuration: Use Switch rather than Hub in order to maximize UDA Ethernet
performance
Configuration: Ethernet parameters are configured via the front-panel or web pages.
Modbus TCP/IP: Five simultaneous socket connections provide monitoring of inputs outputs, statuses,
alarms, and variables. Provides writing of variables for remotely modifying parameter settings.
Modbus TCP/IP Data Format: IEEE floating point and 32-bit integer. Word swap configurable.
Web server: multiple client support
Multi-language Web pages: monitoring inputs, outputs, statuses, alarms, and events
Multi-language Email: Alarm notification to eight email addresses. These must be configured using
web pages signed in as the administrator.
DHCP: ( Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) selectable via web page or front-panel
Safety Compliance UL/CSA General Purpose
FM/CSA Approval for Class I, Div 2; Groups A, B, C and D. T4, Ta =60°C
CE Compliance CE Conformity (Europe): CE Mark on all models signifies compliance to EMC Directive 84/336/EEC
and LVD Directive 73/23/EEC.
EMC Classification: Group 1, Class A, ISM Equipment
Method of Assessment: Technical File (EN61010-1; EN 61326)
Declaration of Conformity: 51453667
Case Dimensions 156 mm X 156 mm X 150 mm (6.14” X 6.14” X 5.91”)
Panel cutout: 138.5 mm X 138.5 mm (5.45” X 5.45”)
Panel thickness: 1.52 mm (0.06”) min, 9.5 mm (0.38”) max
Enclosure Rating CSA Type 4X (NEMA 4X) rated enclosure
FM Class 1, Div 2
Installation Ratings Installation Category (Overvoltage Category): Category II
Pollution Degree: 2
Altitude: 2000 m
Weight Approx 3 lbs (6.6kg)
Mounting Panel mounting-hardware supplied.
Optional Wall and 1” to 2” pipe mounting. Select option appropriate in Model Number.

2.2 CE Conformity (Europe)

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the following European
Council Directives: 73/23/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive, and 89/336/EEC, the EMC
Directive. Conformity of this product with any other “CE Mark” Directive(s) shall not be
assumed.
Product Classification: Class I: Permanently connected, panel-mounted Industrial
Control Equipment with protective earthing (grounding) (EN61010-1).
Enclosure Rating: The front panel of the analyzer is rated at NEMA4X when properly
installed.
Installation Category (Overvoltage Category): Category II (EN61010-1)
Pollution Degree: Pollution Degree 2: Normally non-conductive pollution with
occasional conductivity caused by condensation. (Ref. IEC 664-1)
EMC Classification: Group 1, Class A, ISM Equipment (EN61326, emissions), Industrial
Equipment (EN61326, immunity)
Method of EMC Assessment: Technical File (TF)

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 7

Specifications

ATTENTION
The emission limits of EN61326 are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area may cause harmful interference. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and may cause interference to radio and television reception when the equipment is used closer
than 30 meters (98 feet) to the antenna (e). In special cases, when highly susceptible apparatus is used in
close proximity, you may have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the
electromagnetic emissions of this equipment.

WARNING
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the
equipment may be impaired.

8 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Unpacking

3 Unpacking, Preparation, and Mounting

3.1 Overview
Introduction
This section contains instructions for unpacking, preparing, and mounting the Analyzer.
Instructions for wiring are provided in Section 4 (power wiring) and Section 7 (input
wiring). Software configuration is described in Section 6.
The UDA2182 Analyzer can be panel, wall, or pipe mounted.
Each unit has (4) 22.22mm [.87"] dia. holes on the bottom of the unit for lead wires and
conduit fittings. The user supplies the conduit fittings.

CAUTION
To avoid damage to the case when connecting to a rigid metallic conduit system, the
conduit hub must be connected to the conduit before the hub is connected to the
enclosure

ATTENTION
When installing the unit, you must select appropriate watertight fittings to insure
watertight integrity.

What’s in this section?

The topics in this section are listed below.

Topic See Page

3.1 Overview 9
3.2 Unpacking and Preparing 10
3.3 Mounting 10

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 9

Unpacking

3.2 Unpacking and Preparing

Procedure
Table 3-1 Procedure for Unpacking and Preparing the UDA2182
Step Action

ATTENTION
For prolonged storage or for shipment, the instrument should be kept in its shipping container.
Do not remove shipping clamps or covers. Store in a suitable environment only (see specifications in Section 2).

1 Carefully remove the instrument from the shipping container.

2 Compare the contents of the shipping container with the packing list.

• Notify the carrier and Honeywell immediately if there is equipment damage or shortage.

• Do not return goods without contacting Honeywell in advance.

3 Remove any shipping ties or packing material. Follow the instructions on any attached tags, and then
remove such tags.

4 All UDA2182 Analyzers are calibrated and tested at the factory prior to shipment. Examine the model
number on the nameplate to verify that the instrument has the correct optional features.

5 Select an installation location that meets the specifications in Section 2. The UDA2182 can be panel-
, wall-, or pipe-mounted (see Section 3.3).

ATTENTION
Pipe mounting is not recommended if the pipe is subject to severe vibration. Excessive vibration may affect
system performance.

6 If extremely hot or cold objects are near the installation location, provide radiant heat shielding for the
instrument.

3.3 Mounting
Introduction
The Analyzer can be mounted on either a vertical or tilted panel or can be pipe or wall
mounted (option) using the mounting kit supplied. Overall dimensions and panel cutout
requirements for mounting the analyzer are shown in Figure 3-1. Pipe mounting is
shown in Figure 3-3. Wall Mounting is shown in Figure 3-4.
For Sample Tap Electrode Mounting recommendations, See Section 15.15 – page 229.
The analyzer’s mounting enclosure must be grounded according to CSA standard C22.2
No. 0.4 or Factory Mutual Class No. 3820 paragraph 6.1.5.
Before mounting the analyzer, refer to the nameplate on the outside of the case and make
a note of the model number. It will help later when selecting the proper wiring
configuration.

10 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Unpacking

Panel Mounting Dimensions

+1
138 -0
[5.43] +.04
-0

+1
Panel Cutout 138 -0
[5.43] +.04
-0

Customer will need to provide a rear panel support

plate to maintain NEMA4 protection if primary
panel thickness is less that 2.3mm [0.09”] thick
CUSTOMER PANEL
1.6[.06] to 6.35 MAX[0.25]
156 33.5 152
[6.14] [1.32] [5.98]

156
[6.14]

(4) 22.22[.87] holes for

lead wires and conduit fittings
(conduit fittings supplied by user)

Figure 3-1 Panel Mounting Dimensions (not to scale)

Panel Mounting Procedure

Table 3-2 Panel Mounting Procedure
Step Action
1 Mark and cut out the analyzer hole in the panel according to the dimension information
in Figure 3-1.
2 Orient the case properly and slide it through the panel hole from the front.
Customer will need to provide a rear panel support plate to maintain NEMA4
protection if primary panel thickness is less that 2.3mm [0.09”] thick –
See Figure 3-2.
3 Remove the mounting kit from the shipping container and clamp the edges of the
cutout between the case flange and the supplied U-bracket that is fastened to the rear
of the case using (2) M5 X 16mm long screws and (2) M5 lock washers supplied.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 11

Unpacking

Rear Panel Support Plate Dimensions

Figure 3-2 Rear Panel Support Plate Dimensions

12 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Unpacking

Pipe Mounting
The analyzer can be mounted vertically or horizontally on a pipe. Use the bracket and
hardware supplied in the mounting kit.
Select 1 inch or 2 inch U-Bolts.
ATTENTION
Pipe mounting is not recommended if the pipe is subject to severe vibration. Excessive
vibration may affect system performance.

M5 X 10mm long screw with M5 lock washer (2 places)

Note orientation of hole and slot in mounting bracket.
M8 Nut Hole is to be in the upper position.
M8 Lock Washer
M8 Flat Washer

195.1
[7.68]

97.5
[3.84]

188.1 77.4
[7.40] [3.05]
156
[6.14]
Do not over
1 or 2 inch Vertical Rear Pipe Mounting
tighten fasteners
4.5Nm (40 Lb-in) of
torque max.
97.5 97.5
188.1 [3.84] [3.84]
[7.40]

78
[3.07]

78
[3.07]

1 or 2 inch Horizontal Rear Pipe Mounting

Figure 3-3 Pipe Mounting Dimensions (not to scale)

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 13

Unpacking

Wall Mounting Dimensions

The analyzer can be mounted on a wall. Use the bracket and hardware supplied in the
mounting kit.
188.1
[7.40]

195.06
[7.680]
Left hand
Side View

97.53
[3.840]

195.1
195.1 [7.68]
97.5 [7.68]
[3.84]

83.9
38.5 [3.30]
[1.51]

77 Front View
[3.03] Mounting Bracket
Horizontal

83.9
[3.30]

Four slots in bracket for 167.6

[6.60]
6.0mm [1/4 “] dia mounting
bolts supplied by customer

83.9
[3.30]

167.8
[6.61]

Front View
Mounting Bracket
Vertical

38.5
[1.52]
77
[3.03]

Figure 3-4 Wall Mounting Dimensions (not to scale)

14 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Power Wiring

4 Power Wiring

4.1 Overview
Introduction
This section contains instructions for installing ac power wiring for the Analyzer, in
preparation for performing configuration setup as described in Section 6.
We recommend that you wait to install input and output wiring (See Section 7) until after
Configuration Setup. During configuration the software will determine for you, which
relay to use for each feature.

What’s in this section?

The topics in this section are listed below.

Topic See Page

4.1 Overview 15
4.2 General Wiring Practices 16
4.3 Power Wiring Considerations 17
4.4 Installing Power Wiring 17

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 15

Power Wiring

4.2 General Wiring Practices

WARNING
Qualified personnel should perform wiring only.

Safety precaution

WARNING
A disconnect switch must be installed to break all current
carrying conductors. Turn off power before working on
conductors. Failure to observe this precaution may result in
serious personal injury.

WARNING
An external disconnect switch is required for any hazardous
voltage connections to the relay outputs.

Avoid damage to components

ATTENTION
This equipment contains devices that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). As
solid-state technology advances and as solid-state devices get smaller and smaller, they
become more and more sensitive to ESD. The damage incurred may not cause the device to
fail completely, but may cause early failure. Therefore, it is imperative that assemblies
containing static sensitive devices be carried in conductive plastic bags. When adjusting or
performing any work on such assemblies, grounded workstations and wrist straps must be
used. If soldering irons are used, they must also be grounded.

A grounded workstation is any conductive or metallic surface connected to an earth ground,

such as a water pipe, with a 1/2 to 1 megohm resistor in series with the ground connection. The
purpose of the resistor is to current limit an electrostatic discharge and to prevent any shock
hazard to the operator. The steps indicated above must be followed to prevent damage and/or
degradation, which may be induced by ESD, to static sensitive devices.

Wiring for immunity compliance

In applications where either the power, input or output wiring are subject to
electromagnetic disturbances, shielding techniques will be required. Grounded metal
conduit with conductive conduit fittings is recommended.
Connect the AC mains through a fused disconnect switch.

Conform to code
Instrument wiring should conform to regulations of the National Electrical Code.

16 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Power Wiring

4.3 Power Wiring Considerations

Recommended wire size
Observe all applicable electrical codes when making power connections. Unless locally
applicable codes dictate otherwise, use 14-gauge (2.081 mm2) wire for ac power,
including protective earth.

Power supply voltage and frequency within specs

The power supply voltage and frequency must be within the limits stated in the
specifications in Section 2.

4.4 Installing Power Wiring

Procedure
WARNING
Turn power off at mains before installing AC Power Wiring.
Do not remove boards with power ON.

WARNING
The ground terminal must be connected to a reliable earth
ground for proper operation and to comply with OSHA and
other safety codes. If metal conduit is used, connect a bonding
wire between conduits. Do not rely upon the conductive coating
of the instrument case to provide this connection. Failure to
observe this precaution may result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION
To avoid damage to the case when connecting to a rigid metallic conduit system, the
conduit hub must be connected to the conduit before the hub is connected to the
enclosure

Table 4-1 Procedure for installing AC Power Wiring

Step Action
1 Check the tag on the outside of the case to be sure that the voltage rating of the unit
matches the input voltage at your site.

ATTENTION
The Unit may be damaged if you apply power with the wrong voltage.
2 With Power off, open the case:
• Loosen the four captive screws on the front of the bezel.
• Grasp the bezel on the right side. Lift the bezel gently and swing the bezel open to the left.
3 Refer to Figure 7-1 for the location of the printed wiring board retainer. Loosen the two

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 17

Power Wiring

Step Action
screws that hold the retainer and slide the retainer to the left until the retainer tabs
disengage from the terminal boards.
4 Refer to Figure 7-1 for the location of the Power Supply/Analog Output/Relay Output board.
Insert a screwdriver into the hole in the middle of the terminal board and pull out gently.
Slide the board half way out. There is a notch in the terminal board into which you can slide
the retainer tabs and hold the board in place while wiring.
5 Install a fused disconnect switch in the power line that will be connected to the Analyzer.
•If a 230/240 Vac line is to be connected, use a 0.15 amp fuse.
•If a 110/120 Vac line is to be connected, use a 0.30 amp fuse.
Fuse must be a Time-Delay or Slo-Blo type.
6 Each unit has (4) 22.22mm [.87"] dia. holes on the bottom of the unit for lead wires and
conduit fittings. Conduit fittings to be supplied by the user.
Feed the power wiring through the wiring port on the bottom of the case. Connect the power
wiring to terminals L1 and L2/N as shown in Figure 4-1. Connect the Green safety ground
wire to the grounding stud on the case.

Attention: Terminal 1 must be connected to the ground stud on the grounding bar using
a #14 AWG UL/CSA-approved wire.
7 Slide the retainer to the left then slide the terminal board back into place. Slide retainer to
engage the tabs and tighten the screws.
8 Close the Bezel and secure four captive screws to a torque value of .20 Nm (1.5 Lb-in).
Power up the unit.
Do not apply power until the bezel is closed.

18 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Power Wiring

Analog Output 1 (+) 13

Analog Output 1 (–) 12

Analog Output 2 (+) 11

Analog Output 2 (–) 10

Relay Output 1 (N.O.) 9

Relay Output 1 (COM) 8

Relay Output 1 (N.C.) 7

Relay Output 2 (N.O.) 6

Relay Output 2 (COM) 5

Relay Output 2 (N.C.) 4

AC Hot L1

AC N L2

1 Case Earth Ground

Grounding Stud
on Case

Figure 4-1 Power Wiring

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 19

Operating the Analyzer

5 Operating the Analyzer

5.1 Overview
Introduction
This section contains instructions for operating the Analyzer.

What’s in this section?

The topics in this section are listed below.

Topic See Page

5.1 Overview 20
5.2 Analyzer Overview 21
5.3 Key Navigation 22
5.4 Displays Overview 23
5.5 Input Displays 25
5.6 PID Displays 26
5.7 Auto Cycle Displays 28
5.8 Pharma Display 33
5.10 Status Display 41
5.11 Event History 46
5.12 Process Instrument Explorer Software 48

20 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Operating the Analyzer

5.2 Analyzer Overview

The UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer is the next level of dual channel analyzers
providing unprecedented versatility and flexibility.
The analyzer can accept single or dual inputs from Honeywell Direct pH, pH from
preamp, ORP (Oxidation Reduction Potential), Contacting Conductivity and Dissolved
Oxygen sensors.
Measurement for Dual channel units can be arranged in any combination of
measurement.
A Communications card provides one Serial Port (RS485) and one Ethernet Port.

Figure 5-1 UDA2182 Operator Interface (all display items shown)

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 21

Operating the Analyzer

5.3 Key Navigation

Table 5-1 shows each key on the operator interface and defines its function.
Table 5-1 Function of Keys
Key Function
• When process values are on display: Use DISPLAY to cycle between PV
Displays, PID Loop Displays, Auto Cycle Displays, Pharma Displays, Cation
Display Display, Status Displays and an Event History Display.
• In Setup mode, calibration mode, or calibration edit mode, use DISPLAY to
abort current mode and return to the last accessed online display.
• Engages hold of analog and digital values at their current values and any
relays assigned to alarm events or control are deactivated.

Hold
ATTENTION: This takes precedence over the FAILSAFE function.

• Selects the configuration main menu when online, in calibration mode, or at a

Setup calibration submenu.

• In configuration menu, exits submenu to parent menu. If at configuration main

menu, selects current online display.
Exit • In configuration edit mode, aborts editing of current parameter.
• When online, acknowledges current alarm event to stop the flashing of the
relay indicator and status message area.
• Selects the calibration main screen when online, in configuration mode or at
Calibrate another calibration screen.

• When a Setup configuration menu or configuration edit screen is on display:

Use Up/Down keys to highlight a different item.
• In configuration edit mode, either selects the parameter character or
or numerical digit to change or selects an enumerated parameter value:
Use Up/Down key to increment the value of the digit at the cursor.
Increases/decreases the selected parameter value.
• When in display mode, use up/down keys to adjust the contrast on the screen.
• In configuration edit mode, selects the character or digit to change.
• In calibration mode, selects the next or previous calibration screen.
or
• In display mode, selects a single or dual display on a unit with dual input.

• In configuration menu, selects edit mode for selected parameter.

• In configuration edit mode, saves edited parameter selection or value.
Enter
• In calibration mode, selects parameters to reset and the next calibration
screen.

22 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Operating the Analyzer

5.4 Displays Overview

Viewing the Displays
Display
To view display screens, push the key. Pushing the Display key repeatedly scrolls through
screens which show the current status of pH/ORP, Conductivity, or Dissolved Oxygen
Concentration. There are displays for PID, Auto Cycle, and Pharma. It also lets you view a Status
Display and an Event History Display.
Displays Shown
One Input - When only one input board is installed, the online screen displays one PV and its
units in a larger font size (Section 5.5).
Two Inputs - When two input boards are installed, the online screen displays two PVs and its
units in a smaller font size. Press to see single PV screens (Section 5.5).
PID - When PID 1 or 2 is active (Section 5.6 ), there is a display screen for each. There is a sub-
screen that allows editing of the Setpoint value, Setpoint Source, Control Mode, and Output
value. You can also enable or disable Accutune and Tune set.
Auto Cycle – When Auto Cycle 1 or 2 is active (Section 5.7), there is a display screen for each.
There is a sub-screen that allows you to start or stop the Cycle.
Pharma – Enabled in Conductivity inputs. Each Pharma screen monitors standard procedure
stages for determining Purified Water. There is a sub-screen that allows you to change the
Pharma Test Stage and adjust the Pct Warning value (Stage 1), Test µS/cm value (Stage 2) and
the Test pH (Stage 3). (See Section 5.8 for details)
Cation Calc – When cation Calc 1 or 2 is active there is a display screen for either cation
or degassed CO2 measurement. (Section 5.9)
Status Display - of Alarms Status, PID Alarms Status, Logic Status, Input Status, Output Levels,
Relay States, Monitor Status, Math Values, Aux Values, Variables, Comm Status, System Status,
and Calculated Values. (Section 5.10)
Event History - Event History records events with timestamp. (Section 5.11) Events recorded
include setup change, power on, calibrations (no values) and alarms with detail available on alarm
type and source by scrolling and selecting event name. Status warns of event history at 50% and
90% and when erasing old records.
Contrast Adjustment
When viewing a PV or Control display, you can adjust the contrast by pressing the or key.
Bargraphs Overview
Output Bargraphs will represent up to three current output values. On the display, the Bargraphs
are the output in Engineering Units. The corner annunciators are the physical relay states (light –
de-energized, dark – energized). The third output and the 3 and 4 relays are shown only when the
source other than NONE is selected.
Menu Indicators
An upward-pointing arrow indicator above the menu at the left end of the header appears when
there are currently menu items above the screen accessible by moving the cursor up.
A downward-pointing arrow indicator below the menu at the left end of the status footer appears
when there are currently menu items below the screen accessible by moving the cursor down.
Use the keys.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 23

Operating the Analyzer

Online Functions
Table 5-2 Display Details Functions
Detail Function

Process Variable When two input boards are installed, the default online screen displays both PVs and
Values their units of measure, as determined by the input boards, the probe (if memory-
embedded) or any measurement configuration options that may be available. When
only one input board is installed, the default online screen displays one PV and its units
in a larger font size.
The currently selected PV type determines the numerical format and the units of
measure on the online PV display. Measured PV is generally displayed in the highest
decimal precision possible with five digits and has a potentially displayable range of
0.0000 to 99999. The exceptions are dissolved oxygen, pH, ORP and temperature,
which are displayed with fixed decimal precision.
PV Type determines specific ranges and in the case of Conductivity, cell constant
determines available PV Types. Each PV measurement and display is updated every
500ms maximum. Each temperature measurement and display is updated every 10
seconds maximum.
See the Specific Input configuration for available ranges. (Section 6.6)

Tag Name The real-time displays of process values show the instrument’s tag name (or other
configurable fixed sixteen-character string) at the top of the screen.

PV Temperature Each PV value is accompanied by a temperature value for all measurements except
ORP, as ORP probes do not contain temperature sensors and no measurement
compensation for temperature is required. Temperature values are displayed in units of
degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius as determined by configuration.
Measured temperature is always expressed in fixed tenths decimal precision and has a
displayed range according to input type:
PH/ORP -10.0 to 110.0°C or 14.0 to 230.0°F
Conductivity 0 to 140.0°C or 32.0 to 284°F
Dissolved Oxygen 0 to 60.0°C or 32 to 140°F

Status Messages A text string appears on the bottom of all displays. Online displays provide messages
relaying online diagnostics, alarms and other events. Offline screens display messages
relevant to data entry and calibration. See Section 12.

Bargraphs The Bargraphs will represent up to three output values. The corner indicators represent
the physical state of the Relay Outputs [1, 2, 3, and 4].
*Note that all values and indicators on the main (input) display screen are maintained in the input setup
group.

24 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Operating the Analyzer

5.5 Input Displays

Two Input Display
Display
Press . You will see:
PV1 Value Tag Name PV Units PV Temperature

Relay 1 Physical State Relay 3 Physical State

White – De-energized 1 UDA2182 3 White – De-energized
Black - Energized Black - Energized

Solution Temperature 7.00 pH

Compensation PV1
1 2
C4H9NO 25.0 ºC 3 Output 3 Bargraph*
Output 1 Bargraph*

Output 2 Bargraph* 0.000 µS/cm

0.0 ºC
Solution Temperature NaCl
Compensation PV2 2 Probe PV 2 Fault 4 Relay 4 Physical State
White – De-energized
Relay 2 Physical State Black - Energized
White – De-energized PV2 Value Diagnostics or Alarm Message
Black - Energized

*On the display, the bargraphs are the outputs in Engineering Units,
the corner annunciators are the physical relay states.

Figure 5-2 Example – Two Input Display

Single Displays
For single displays on a two input unit;
Press to display a single display for Input 1.
Press again to display a single display for Input 2.
Press again to return to a Dual Display.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 25

Operating the Analyzer

5.6 PID Displays

Overview
When PID 1 or 2 is active - there is a display screen for each. There is a sub-screen that
allows editing of the Setpoint value, Setpoint Source, Control Mode, and Output value.
You can also enable or disable Accutune and Tune Set.

Selecting Control Display

Display
Press until you see the PID Display screen. If PID 1 and 2 have been configured,
press DISPLAY again. In each instance, you can edit some control parameters. See Table
5-3.
PID Loop
PV1 or PV 2 Value 1 or 2 PV Units Control Mode
Auto or Manual*

Relay 1 Physical State

White – De-energized 1 PID LOOP 1 3 Relay 3 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
Black - Energized

0.00 pH
Output Value*
1 2
Auto

Setpoint Indicator
0.00 0.0
Relay 2 Physical State
White – De-energized
2 4 Relay 4 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
Black - Energized
Working Setpoint Value*

*These Control parameters can be edited. See Table 5-3.

Figure 5-3 PID Loop 1 Edit Display screen example

26 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Operating the Analyzer

Changing Parameters on the PID Display

When either PID Display is on the Display screen, you can edit the Setpoint value,
Setpoint Source, Control Mode, and the Output value. You can also enable or disable
Accutune and Tune Set.
Table 5-3 Changing PID Parameters on the Display
Press Action

Enter to access the PID Parameters. You will see:

PID LOOP 1
LSP 0.00
SP Source Local SP
Mode Manual
Output 0.00
Tune Set 2 Disable

Example – PID Loop 1 Edit Display

to highlight the parameter you want to change.
Enter to access the value or selection of each.

to change the value or selection.

Note: Output can only be changed in Manual mode.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – ”General Rules for Editing”.
Enter to make the edit permanent.

Display to return to the selected PID Display.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 27

Operating the Analyzer

5.7 Auto Cycle Displays

5.7.1 Overview
Auto Cycling allows each input probe to be automatically rinsed and calibrated on a
recurring schedule, in response to an event, or on demand.
Auto cycling is supported with Setup Menus ( Section 6.15- Auto Cycle Configuration),
Status Displays (Section 5.10 – Status Display) and Operational Displays (Section 5.7 as
well as Event History (Section 5.11) and Calibration History logging (Section 11).
5.7.2 Access to Auto Cycle Displays
• When Auto Cycle is enabled (see Auto Cycling Setup –Section 6.15),
Display
press until you see:
Sequence Auto Cycle 1 or 2 Current Clock Time or
Step* remaining Elapsed Time

Relay 1 Physical State AUTO CYCLE 1

White – De-energized 1 3 Relay 3 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
Black - Energized
Cycle Stop [Link]
PV µS/cm PV Units
1
0.00 27.2 ºC
2
Input Temperature

Date and Time of next cycle;

Next 06-05-01 [Link]PM Cycle Timer is Off:
or Fail Detail Message
Relay 2 Physical State
White – De-energized
2 4
Black - Energized
Relay 4 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized

* See Table 5-5.

Figure 5-4 Auto Cycle Display screen example

28 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Operating the Analyzer

5.7.3 How it works

Each occurrence of a sequence of actions for the cleaning and calibration of a probe is a
cycle. The status message “Auto Cycle n Active” appears for the duration of a non-
failing cycle (where n refers to 1 or 2). Each cycle consists of the following sequence that
will vary depending on the input type and parameters selected:
Cycle Start
Probe Extract (if enabled)
Probe Rinse
Cal pt 1
Cal pt 2 (If the input is pH)
Probe Insert (If enabled)
Resume Delay (If a time is selected)
For a more detailed explanation please refer to Table 5-5.
5.7.4 Displays
The current sequence step is shown in the upper half of the Auto Cycle display.
When Cycle Stop is displayed, the field to the right displays the current clock time in the
format configured in Setup/Maintenance/Clock.
When the cycle is active, the same field provides the remaining elapsed time for the
current sequence step.
The lower half of the Auto Cycle display provides either: the date and time of the next
cycle, an indication that the cycle timer is off; or an auto cycle fail detail message.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 29

Operating the Analyzer

5.7.5 Hold Active

If Hold Active is enabled in Auto cycling Setup, then the values remain in the hold state
during auto cycle. When Hold is active on either input, the status message “Hold Active”
is displayed and the specific PV value flashes at a very slow rate.
When Hold is activated manually from the front panel Hold button, the values remain in
the hold state until its state is changed via the front panel again.
5.7.6 Probe Transit
This parameter is available to allow you to automate functions that relate to probe
removal and insertion. Once the probe transit parameter is enabled, the extract wait
source, insert wait source and max transit mins can be selected. The extract wait source
and insert wait source can be set to any digital input so that the extract or insert
operations continue until the selected digital input is low. Once the wait source signal is
low then the probe extraction or insertion sequence step can end or otherwise time out if
the duration of the “max transit mins” is exceeded. If probe transit is enabled and probe
extract src/insert src is set to none, then the probe extract/insert step will occur for the
duration of the max transit mins.
5.7.7 Cycle Start Src
The Auto cycle can be started in one of three ways. It can start upon the occurrence of a
specific digital input changing state from low to high. The cycle can also start when the
cycle timer engages. The cycle can also be manually started from the Auto Cycle display
screen op panel.
5.7.8 Cycle Interval
This parameter enables the cycle timer and allows you to set the Auto cycle to recur at a
period defined by you. If the cycle interval is set to Custom, Monthly, Weekly or Daily
then specific menu items are activated to set-up cycle start and period times. You can
select a cycle interval appropriate to the application.
5.7.9 Rinse Cycle Cnt
This parameter allows you to select when or if a rinse sequence occurs during a cycle. A
selection of 0 indicates that a rinse sequence will not occur. A selection of 1 indicates
that a rinse sequence occurs during every cycle. There is an option to set the rinse
sequence for less frequent times by selecting values from 2 to 100. For example; a
selection of 3 means that the rinse sequence will occur every 3rd cycle.
5.7.10 Rinse Mins
This parameter allows you to select the duration of a rinse.
5.7.11 Resume Dly Mins
This parameter allows you to specify a delay time before the cycle is completed.

30 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Operating the Analyzer

5.7.12 Manual Starting/Stopping the Auto Cycle

Pressing Enter on the Auto Cycle Operational Display brings up an operator panel menu
that enables you to manually start or stop an auto cycle sequence or place the cycle in
Hold, regardless of whether or not the cycle timer is configured. Start cycle is visible
when the Auto Cycle is not active and Stop Cycle is visible during an auto cycle.
The objective of a Cycle Stop is to terminate the Auto Cycle by putting the probe back
into the process. The selection of Cycle Stop causes the sequencer to proceed directly to
the Probe Insert stage, if Probe Transit is enabled, and then to the Resume Delay stage.
Selecting Stop Cycle during Probe Insert advances the sequencer to resume delay.
Finally, a Stop Cycle selection during Resume Delay will stop the cycle completely.
If enabled, the cycle timer will still trigger a cycle at the configured time provided the
sequencer returns to Cycle Stop beforehand. Otherwise, the cycle will execute at the next
available time.
The Hold Cycle selection is available in both auto cycle active and inactive states. When
inactive, enabling Hold Cycle will hold the sequencer at the beginning of the sequence
until released to continue by disabling the Hold Cycle.
Selecting Hold Cycle during an active cycle will suspend the sequencer at the current
step as well as the step timer. Disabling Hold Cycle will resume the sequencer and step
timer. During cycle Hold, the status bar will show the message “Auto Cycle in hold”.
Table 5-4 Manually Starting/Stopping the Auto Cycle
Press Action

Enter to access the Auto Cycle Operator Panel. You will see:
1 AUTO CYCLE 1 3
Cycle Stop [Link]
Start Cycle No
µS/cm
1
0.00 Hold Cycle No
27.2 ºC
2

Next 06.03.29 [Link]

2 4

Example – AUTO CYCLE 1 Operator Panel

Note: The item “Start Cycle” is replaced with “Stop
Cycle” when the cycle is active.
To access Start Cycle or Hold Cycle
Enter to access the Start Cycle/Hold Cycle selection.

to change the selection from NO to YES.

Start Cycle YES
Hold Cycle No

Enter to Start or Hold the Auto Cycle.

See Table 5-5 for sequencer steps.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 31

Operating the Analyzer

5.7.13 Auto Cycle Fail

The status message “Auto Cycle n Fail” is displayed during a fail state. Once detected,
the current cycle proceeds immediately to the Probe Insert step (if enabled) or to the
Resume Delay step. The fail state remains for the duration of the Resume Delay,
whereupon the fail state returns to zero and the fail message is cancelled.
A fail state also provides a detail message in the lower half of the Auto Cycle display
regarding the specific reason for the error. These messages are listed in Section 12.4.
The digital output “AC n Fail” is also available and is active whenever an auto cycle
failure has occurred. The auto cycle digital outputs: AC n Extract, AC n Rinse, AC n Cal
Pt 1 and AC n Cal and AC n Cal 2 are available as relay digital input sources (See Table
6-4) to control the operation of valves and solenoids for exposure to rinse water and
buffer solutions or air to accomplish the automatic probe rinse and calibration functions.
5.7.14 Conditional Sequencer Steps
Table 5-5 Conditional Sequencer Steps for Auto Cycle
Step AC n AC n AC n AC n Output Condition
Extract Rinse Cal Cal 2 Hold
State
(if
enabled)
Cycle Stop 0 0 0 0 Inactive Cycle inactive
Cycle Start 0 0 0 0 Active Operator panel Cycle Start is Yes
(transitional) or Cycle Start Src state is 1
or cycle timer engages
Probe Extract 1 0 0 0 Active Probe Transit is enabled
Probe Rinse 1 1 0 0 Active Rinse Cycle Cnt > 0 and enables
current cycle
and if Probe Transit enabled,
Extract Wait Src is None or state is
1 or Max Transit Timer expires
Cal Point 1 1 1 1 0 Active Rinse timer expires if enabled
and Cal 1 (Cal) Cycle Cnt > 0 and
enables current cycle
Cal Point 2 1 1 0 1 Active Rinse timer expires or Cal 1
complete
and Cal 2 Cycle Cnt > 0 and
enables current cycle
Probe Insert 0 1 0 0 Active Auto Cycle Fail
or Probe Transit is enabled
Resume Delay 0 0 0 0 Active Auto Cycle Fail
or Rinse timer expires or Cal 1 or
Cal 2 complete
and Insert Wait Src is None or state
is 1 or Max Transit Timer expires

32 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Operating the Analyzer

5.8 Pharma Display

5.8.1 Overview
The Pharma Parameter is available when a Conductivity Input is enabled. Pharma
supports USP (United States Pharmacopoeia) and PhEur (Pharmacopoeia Europa)
standard procedure stages for determining Purified Water.
Selecting Pharma Type USP or PhEur (in Section 6.6 – Conductivity Input
Configuration) enables the Pharma monitor screen and adds it to the sequence of displays
accessed by each press of the Display button.
Also, configure Pharma PV High, Pharma PV Low, and Pharma Timer Minutes in this
section.
5.8.2 How it works
Pharmacopoeia Test Procedure
For Procedure steps in each stage, refer to UPS section <645> Test Procedure for
Purified Water and Water for Injection. The procedure for this determination involves a
series of three stages or tests. If the sample does not pass the Stage 1 conductivity
requirement, the State 2 test can be initiated. If the Stage 2 requirements are not met,
then the Stage 3 test can be initiated. If Stage 3 requirements are not met, the sample is
not Purified Water.
In Stage 1 the non-temperature-compensated conductivity reading is compared to the
value specified in the USP standard for a particular temperature. If the measured
conductivity is not greater than the table value, the water meets the requirements of the
test for conductivity and the Pharma test is complete. If the conductivity is higher than
the table value, then the user can manually proceed with Stage 2.
To complete stage 2, transfer a sufficient amount of water (100 mL or more) to a suitable
container, and stir the test specimen. While maintaining the temperature at 25° ± 1°,
begin vigorously agitating the test specimen and note the conductivity reading when the
change is less than 0.1 m S/cm per 5 minutes. If the conductivity is not greater than 2.1
m S/cm, the water meets the requirements of the test for conductivity. If the conductivity
is greater than 2.1 m S/cm, proceed with Stage 3.
Stage 3 must be completed within approximately 5 minutes of the conductivity
determination in stage 2. While maintaining the sample temperature at 25° ± 1°, add a
saturated potassium chloride solution to the same water sample (0.3 mL per 100 mL of
the test specimen), and measure the pH to the nearest 0.1 pH unit, as directed under pH
(791). From USP section <645>, determine the desired conductivity value for a pH value
between 5pH and 7pH. If the measured conductivity is not greater than the conductivity
from USP, section <625>, the water meets the requirements for stage 3 - purified water.
If either the measured conductivity is greater than this value or the pH is outside of the
range of 5.0 to 7.0, the water does not meet the requirements of stage 3 - purified water.
For Procedure steps in each stage, refer to UPS section <645> Test Procedure for
Purified Water and Water for Injection.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 33

Operating the Analyzer

The UDA also supports Pharma Europa (PhEur) section 2.2.38, which specifies tests for
determining Highly Purified Water which are identical to USP Stages 1, 2 and 3. PhEur
adds a less demanding test for determining Purified Water at the end of the sequence.
5.8.3 Access to Pharma Display
• When Pharma is enabled (see Input Configuration – Section 6.6) press
Display
until you see:
The measured temperature-
uncompensated conductivity
of the solution in µS/cm Right Pointer -
Pharma Warning Limit
Measurement relative to test limit Relay 3 Physical State
Relay 1 Physical State White – De-energized
White – De-energized Black - Energized
Black - Energized 1 PHARMA 1 3
The measured temperature
Left Bar graph -Measured of solution in system
solution conductivity scaled by
the parameter values Pharma
High and Pharma Low
0.966 µS/cm
25.7 ºC
temperature Units

Right Bar graph – Graphical percent of

measured conductivity relative to test limit
Stage 1
Left Pointer - Test Limit scaled
by parameters Pharma High and
Pharma Low 1.30 74.3%
Currently select
Pharma Test

The percent of measured

Relay 2 Physical State
White – De-energized
2 4 conductivity relative to test limit
Black - Energized
Purified water test Relay 4 Physical State
limit in units of White – De-energized
measured value Black - Energized

Figure 5-5 Pharma Display screen example

5.8.4 Displays
The upper left portion of the screen shows the measured temperature uncompensated
conductivity of the solution in uS/cm for Stage 1. For stage 2 and 3 it displays the test
conductivity value entered during the measurement in stage 2
The process temperature is shown in the upper right of the screen
The lower right portion of the screen shows the USP stage 1 purified water limit, the
stage 2 limit of 2.1 uS/cm and the stage 3 purified water test limit at the measured pH.
When the Pharma n display window is active the various stages can be accessed through
the pharma op panel. (Table 5-6)

34 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Operating the Analyzer

Table 5-6 Selecting the Pharma Test on Display

Press Action

Enter to access the Pharma Op Panel. A pop-up dialog box will appear:
Pharma Test Stage 1
PCT Warn 80.00

Various parameters appear for each stage:

Parameter Values Visibility
Pharma Test Selection Stage 1 Always on
Stage 2
Stage 3
Pure H2O (PhEur only)
Pct Warning (% at 0 to 100 % Stage 1 only
which the test warn
occurs)
Test µS/cm 0 to 10 (default=10) Stage 2 only
Test pH 0 to 14 (default=0) Stage 3 only

Enter to access the Stage selection.

to change the selection to

Stage 1, Stage 2, Stage 3 or Pure H2O (PhEur only).
Enter to make the selection permanent.

to select Pct Warning (Stage 1 only)

Enter to access the Pct Warning Value and allow editing

to select a value
Enter to make the selection permanent.

to select Test µS/cm (After Stage 2 is selected)

Enter to access the Test µS/cm Value

to select a value
Enter to make the selection permanent.

to select Test pH (After Stage 3 is selected)

Enter to access the Test pH Value

to select a value
Enter to make the selection permanent.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 35

Operating the Analyzer

5.8.5 Pharma Warning and Fail Signal

The Pharma 1 warning limit is entered from the op-panel for stage 1 and is user
selectable. The digital output “Pharma n Warn” is available (See Digital Source Selection
- Table 6-4).
The Pharma Fail signal is generated whenever any of the following conditions are met:
Stage 1 – Measured Conductivity exceeds 100%
Stage 1 – Temperature not within range of 0-100 degrees C
Stage 2 – Conductivity is 0.1 µS/cm or greater for 5 minutes
Stage 3 – pH not within range of 5 – 7pH
Stage 2 and 3 – Temperature not within range of 24 – 26 degrees C.
The digital output “Pharm n Fail” is available (See Digital Source Selection - Table
6-4).
When the Stage 2 or Stage 3 test is successful, the fail signal is cancelled and the Pharma
Timer begins to count down from the timer minutes value that was configured. When the
Timer countdown is completed, the Pharma function block returns to Stage 1. A fail
signal will return if measured conductivity exceeds 100% or warn signal if measured
conductivity exceeds Pct Warning value.
See Section 12.5 for Pharma Fail Messages.

36 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Operating the Analyzer

5.9 Cation Calc Display

5.9.1 Overview
This group allows you to configure dual conductivity inputs for cation or degassed CO2
measurement. The cation selection of Ammonia or Amines will display a calculated pH
value from differential conductivity and provide continuous pH monitoring using
reliable, maintenance free conductivity cells. An outline of the conductivity cells’
installation is illustrated in Figure 5-6.
Gasses
Flow
Valve

Flow

Cation Exchange Column

Cell
Meter
#3

Reboiler
Cell Drain
#2
Cell
#1

Inlet

Specific Cation Degassed

Conductivity Conductivity Conductivity
From Cell #1 From Cell #2 From Cell #3

UDA for Cation Conductivity UDA for Degassed CO2

Figure 5-6 UDA for Cation and Degassed CO2

5.9.2 How it works
UDA2182 will monitor on-line treated water for Specific Conductivity and Cation bed
discharge conductivity, using reliable and maintenance free Honeywell conductivity
cells, and calculate the pH, using the assumption that the water is pure water with Amine
type treatment chemical and residual trace un-removed salts.
pH Calculation from Cation and Specific Conductivity
The equipment consists of Cell #1 which is used for specific conductivity determination
of the influent water sample. The water sample is then passed through a strong acid
cation exchange resin which replaces all cations in the influent stream with hydrogen ion.
On passing though the resin, a second Cell #2 is used to measure the effluent or cation
conductivity. These two measurements in combination are useful for measuring the
amount of base contained in the influent sample and the extent of contamination by
unwanted salts such as sodium chloride, sodium sulfate, etc.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 37

Operating the Analyzer

Degassed CO2
The dual input UDA can also be configured for degassed CO2 measurement by
employing cells #2 and #3. Here the cation effluent stream is degassed of CO2, typically
by heating the cation effluent stream to a near boiling temperature. This heating step
results in CO2 out-gassing. The resulting 25°C compensated conductivity measurement
of Cell #3 is lower in value in proportion to the amount of dissolved CO2.
5.9.3 pH Calculation from Specific and Cation Conductivity Setup
Connect cell 1 to input 1 and cell 2 to input 2. Follow the appropriate instructions to
configure the UDA for Cation Calc (See Section 6.18 – Maintenance Configuration.)
Under the sub menu selection of Inputs, the Cation Calc parameter offers two possible
selections.
1. pH Ammonia: Specific conductivity temperature compensation assumes
ammonia (NH3) is the base reagent. In addition to display of conductivity
values, this selection provides for determination and display of solution
pH value.
2. pH Amine pH: Specific conductivity temperature compensation assuming
a generic amine base. These include any one or combination of the
following amines:
Hydrazine
Morpholine
Ethanolamine
Aminomethylpropanol
Methoxypropylamine
4-aminobutanol
5-aminopentanol
Diaminopropane
Cyclohexylamine
Methylamine
Dimethylamine
1,5-diaminopentane
Piperidine
Pyrrolidine
This generic selection employs ammonia temperature compensation and
optimizes pH calculation for these base reagents.

38 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Operating the Analyzer

Note: The relationship between the electrolytic conductivity and the pH of ammonia and amines is well
established in the technical literature. It must be understood that the UDA was designed for accurate
results over the pH range of 8 to 10.5 based on ammonia or amine chemistries. Other chemistries such as
phosphate or systems that employ alternative anions, such as borate, cannot be expected to realize results
with similar accuracy.
Standardization for cations
The UDA allows for a sample calibration of the cation pH value. Here an independent
sample is withdrawn from the sampling equipment and pH is determined with equipment
of known accuracy. This independent pH value is then entered into the UDA as a pH
calibration constant. To avoid process pH changes during standardization, it is very
desirable to complete the sample extraction, independent measurement and UDA update
as soon as possible.
5.9.4 Calibration
For Calibration procedure, refer to Section 8.7.7 Cation pH Calibration.
5.9.5 CO2 by Degassed Conductivity
The UDA can be configured for CO2 determination by degassed conductivity. The cation
conductivity cell is connected to Input 1 and the degassed sample conductivity cell is
connected to channel 2. The UDA performs HCl temperature compensation of both
measurements to 25°C. The difference between the cation and degassed 25°C values is
taken and ppb CO2 is determined by ASTM D 4519.
5.9.6 Access to Cation Display
• When Cation Calc is enabled (See Section 6.18 – Maintenance
Display
Configuration), press until you see:
PV 1 Value PV 1 Temperature Relay 3 Physical State
Relay 1 Physical State White – De-energized
White – De-energized Black - Energized**
Black - Energized** 1 CATION CALC 3
Calculated Water pH
3.772 µS/cm
Specific Conductivity Specific NH3 28.4 ºC
Output 1 Bar graph

Output 2 Bar graph 9.13 pH

Output 3 Bar graph

0.099 µS/cm 24.1ºC PV 2 Temperature

PV 2 Value Cation HCl

Relay 2 Physical State

2 4
White – De-energized
Black - Energized** Cation Conductivity Relay 4 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized**

Figure 5-7 Cation Display screen example for pH calculations

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 39

Operating the Analyzer

5.9.7 Troubleshooting
In normal operation, both the direct electrode pH measurement and the pH from
differential conductivity should very closely match each other.
If they DO NOT match each other, the possible causes are listed below:
1. Upsets in water chemistry, such as cation exchange resin exhaustion, can cause the
pH readings to not agree with each other.
CHECK EXCHANGE RESIN
2. A low reboiler temperature will not be effective in removing dissolved CO2
resulting in an incorrect and low CO2 indication.
CHECK REBOILER TEMPERATURE
3. Nernst Electrode pH system failure will cause the two readings to disagree.
Electrode pH systems are more susceptible to failure than conductivity cells, and
depleted reference electrodes (incorrectly LOW readings) or broken measuring
electrodes (usually incorrectly HIGH readings) can occur.
CHECK pH ELECTRODE SYSTEM

40 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Operating the Analyzer

5.10 Status Display

Overview
The Status Displays let you see the status of the Alarm Status, PID Alarm Status, Logic
Status, Input Status, Output levels, Relay states, Monitor Status, Math Values, Aux
Values, Auto Cycling, Variables, Comm Status, System Status, and the Calculated values
(Calc Values available only if both units of measurement are identical).

Access to Status Displays

Display
• Press until you see:
STATUS DISPLAY
STATUS DISPLAY
Alarm Status
PID Alarm Status
Logic Status
Input Status
Output Levels
Relay States
Monitor Status
Math Values
Aux Values
Variables
Comm Status
Auto Cycling (if configured)
Calc Values (if configured)

• Use the keys to highlight the Status Display required.

• Press Enter
to display the parameters and the status of each.
Figure 5-8 Status Display screen example

Table 5-7 Status Display Details

Status Parameter Status Status Definition
Display (Read Only)

Alarm Status Alarm 1 ON ON = Latching Alarm in alarm.

Alarm 2 OFF
Alarm 3 Acknowledge alarm by changing status to OFF.
Alarm 4 If status changes back to ON, alarm condition still
exists.

PID Alarm PID 1 Alm 1 ON ON = PID Alarm Active

Status PID 1 Alm 2 OFF
PID 2 Alm 1 PID alarms are not latching.
PID 2 Alm 2

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 41

Operating the Analyzer

Status Parameter Status Status Definition

Display (Read Only)

Logic Status Logic 1 ON Read Only

Logic 2
Logic 3 Off
Logic 4

Input Status In 1 Fault OK or Fail Read Only – depends on the Input selected
In 2 Fault OK or Fail

Digital In 1 On or Off
Digital In 2 On or Off

Output Output 1 mA Output Level in Read Only – depends on the Output type selected at
Levels Output 2 mA Milliamps setup “Outputs”, “Output n”, “Source”:
Output 3 mA None
Input 1 PV
Input 2 PV
Input 1 Tmp
Input 2 Tmp
Pharma Out 1
Pharma Out 2
Math 1
Math 2
Math 3
Math 4
Func Gen 1
Func Gen 2
Switch 1
Switch 2
Sum
Difference
Ratio
%Passage
%Rejection
PID 1
PID 2
See Table 6-6 for configuration.

Relay States Relay 1 State of the Read Only – state depends on the Output source
Relay 2 relay selected at Relay Setup Group, parameter “Relay
Relay 3 Types”:
Relay 4 Digital Output (On or Off)
Time Proportional (Value)
Frequency Proportional Output (Value)
On/Off (On or Off)
Pulse Out (On or Off)
See Table 6-7 for configuration.

Monitor Monitor 1 ON Read Only – State depends on the output of the

Status Monitor 2 analog monitor blocks.
Monitor 3 Off
Monitor 4

42 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Operating the Analyzer

Status Parameter Status Status Definition

Display (Read Only)

Math Values Math 1 Analog Values Read Only – Shows the calculated values of the Math
Math 2 blocks.
Math 3
Math 4

Aux Values Switch 1 Analog Values Read Only – Shows the calculated values of the
Switch 2 blocks in the Aux Group. This includes the current
Func Gen 1 output of the Switch and Function Generator blocks.
Func Gen 2

Variables AnlgVar 1 Analog Values Read Only – shows values of Analog and Digital
AnlgVar 2 variables written from Modbus client.
AnlgVar 3
AnlgVar 4
Dgtl Var 1 Digital Values
Dgtl Var 2 (On or Off)
Dgtl Var 3
Dgtl Var 14

Comm Status Comm Card Stat Ok/ Read Only – This displays the status of the
Not Present/ Communication card. Information present only if the
HW Failure/ Communication card is present.
Fail Comm Card Stat gives the status of the
Init communication card
Status shown OK if the communication card is
working fine.
Status shown as Not present if the communication
card is not present.
Status shown as HW Failure if the communication
card is installed but unable to communicate to the
Main CPU board.
Status shown as Fail if the communication card is not
functioning properly. It could be the result of a
software failure, a bad flash chip on the board or
DHCP is selected but the DHCP server was not found.
Check cable connections and potential network issues
for DHCP related problems.
Status shown as INIT if the communication card is
getting initialized.
SW Version Value SW Version gives the software version of the
Communication Card.
Web Page Value Web Page gives the web page version number. The
web pages are separate from the Communication card
firmware, and can be upgraded independently. Both
the SW version and Web Page version should be the
same value to guarantee compatibility.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 43

Operating the Analyzer

Status Parameter Status Status Definition

Display (Read Only)
WebPgLngSet EE/RT/PC Identifies the web page language set programmed into
the Communications card.
EE web pages support English, French, German,
Italian and Spanish.
RT web pages support English, Russian and Turkish
PC web pages support English, Polish and Czech
Address Value Address states the Modbus RTU slave ID
Baud Rate Value Baud Rate set for RS485
Word Swap Yes/No Word Swap indicates whether the word order set for
Modbus Communications is Little Endian (NO) or Big
Endian (YES)
MACaddr Hi Value MACaddr Hi and MACaddr Low is the MAC address
MACaddr Low of the Communication card
DHCP Yes/No DHCP indicates whether Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol is used.
DHCP is a protocol used by network devices (clients)
to obtain various parameters necessary for the clients
to operate in an Internet Protocol (IP) network.
IPaddr Value IPaddr gives the IP address of the Communication
card.
SubnetMsk Value SubnetMsk indicates the Subnet mask used by the
Communication card.
Gateway Value Gateway Indicates the default Gateway IP address
used by the Communication card.
DnsSrvr Value DnsSrvr displays the DNS (Domain Name Service)
server IP address used by the Communication card
SMTPsrvr Value SMTPsrvr displays the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol) server IP address used by the
Communication card.

Auto Cycling Next Rinse 1 Date and Time Read Only – The Status Displays menu includes an
Next Rinse 2 Auto Cycling selection when any auto cycle is enabled
(if Next Cal 1 and its cycle timer is also enabled. This display
configured) Next Cal 2 provides information on the next occurrences of rinses
and calibrations for any auto cycle with timer
according to the configured cycle count of each
operation.

44 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Operating the Analyzer

Status Parameter Status Status Definition

Display (Read Only)

Calc Values Sum Value Available only if both units of measure between the
two input boards are identical.
(if Difference
configured) See Table 6-5 for configuration.
Ratio
Sum = Input 1 + Input 2
%Passage
Difference = Input 1 – Input 2
%Rejection
Ratio = Input 1 / Input 2
%Passage = Min(Input 1 or 2)/Max(Input 1 or 2) *100
%Rejection = (1-Min(Input 1 or 2)/Max(Input1 or
2))*100

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 45

Operating the Analyzer

5.11 Event History

Overview
Event History records events with timestamp. Events recorded include setup change,
power on, calibrations (no values) and alarms with detail available on alarm type and
source by scrolling and selecting event name. Status warns of event history at 50% and
90% and when erasing old records.

Access to Event History Displays

Displa

• Press until you see:

EVENT HISTORY
Setup Chg 04.19 08:58
Alarm 1 On 03.15 13:02
Setup Chg 03.15 13:01
Hold On 03.15 12:38
Setup Chg 03.15 11:21
Power On 03.09 02:31
HOLD ACTIVE

• Use the keys to highlight the Event History required.

• Press Enter
to display the event, date, time, and alarm parameters.
Figure 5-9 Event History Display screen example

Event History Display Example (Alarm)

ALARM 1 ON
Event Alarm 1
Source Input 1 PV
Type High
State On
Date 2006/03/15
Time [Link]

ALARM 1 INPUT 1 PV HIGH

Figure 5-10 Alarm Event Display screen example (Read Only)

46 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Operating the Analyzer

Clear Event History

• Press Setup
to display the Main menu.
• Use the keys to select “Maintenance” then press Enter
to enter the sub-
menu.
• Use the keys to select “Display” then press Enter
to enter the sub-menu.
• Use the keys to select “Clr Evt Hist” then press Enter
to allow change.
• Use the keys to select “Yes” then press Enter
to clear the Event History
screen.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 47

Operating the Analyzer

5.12 Process Instrument Explorer Software

Overview
Process Instrument Explorer lets you configure your analyzer on a desktop/laptop or
Pocket PC. For details see Process Instrument Explorer manual #51-52-25-131.

Features
• Create configurations with intuitive software program running on a Pocket PC, a
Desktop or a laptop computer. ·
• Create/edit configurations live; just connect software to analyzer via IR port.
• Create/edit configurations offline and download to analyzer later via IR port.
• Infrared port available on every UDA2182.
• This software is available in English, Spanish, Italian, German, French, Russian,
Turkish, Polish and Czech.
• Generate Configuration Reports.

Figure 5-11 Screen capture of Process Instrument Explorer running on a

Pocket PC

48 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Operating the Analyzer

Infrared communications
The infrared connection provides a non-intrusive wireless connection with the instrument
and maintains its waterproof integrity when used in conjunction with the optional PIE
(Process Instrument Explorer Software).
No need to get access to the back of the analyzer to communicate with the instrument, no
need to take your screw driver to wire the communication cable, no wiring mistake
possible. You can now duplicate an instrument’s configuration, upload or download a
new configuration in a matter of seconds, just by pointing your Pocket PC in the direction
of the instrument.
It takes just a few seconds to upload a configuration from an instrument. You can then
save the configuration file onto your PC or pocket PC for review, modification or
archiving. Furthermore, this software also gives you important maintenance information
on the analyzer: instantly, get information on the current operating parameters, digital
inputs and alarm status, identify internal or analog input problems.
Question: What if I have several analyzers on the same panel? How can I be sure I
am communicating with the correct one?
Answer: The infrared port of the analyzer is normally “off”. You activate the infrared
port on a particular analyzer by pressing any key. You can now communicate with the
analyzer. If no communications are received for 2 minutes, the port will be shut down
again.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 49

Operating the Analyzer

5.13 Modbus Communications

Overview
The UDA2182 provides Modbus communication support on two communication
interfaces using the optional Communication Card. A general summary is listed below.
For details see UDA2182 Communications User Guide #70-82-25-126.
Summary
Communications Card (Optional)
The Communications card provides one Serial Port (RS485) and one Ethernet Port.
Serial port provides
• RS422/RS485 multi-drop
• 1200 to 38400 programmable baud rate
• Modbus RTU protocol to read signals including PV, Temperature, Alarm Status,
outputs, relay status, etc.
• Read/write four analog and four digital variables (Note 1)
Ethernet port provides:
• Up to 5 Modbus TCP connections simultaneously
• Ethernet parameters are configured via the front-panel or web pages.
• Web server with up to10 clients simultaneously
• Multi-language Web pages (Note 2) setup the Ethernet port settings and monitor
readings, alarms, statuses, events
• Multi-language Email to send alarm status changes. Alarm notification to eight email
addresses. These must be configured using web pages signed in as the administrator.
• DHCP: ( Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) selectable via web page or front-panel
• Firmware upgrade to Main CPU board
• Firmware upgrade to Communications card
Note 1
There are four analog and four digital variables. These variables can be read and written remotely using Modbus
function codes.
Variables will appear as a selection for various parameters:
• Analog variables can be an alarm source, analog relay source, current output source, monitor source, math
source, auxiliary switch source, PID TRV, and PID remote setpoint.
• Digital variables can be an alarm disable, remote setpoint select, Tune Set2 select, digital relay source, logic-
in source, auxiliary switch select, PID TRC select, PID RSP select, and auto cycle start source
Note 2
Web pages provide the following:
• Multiple language support
• “Guest” accessibility for read-only permission
• “Admin” accessibility for read and write permission
• Readings of Inputs, Outputs, and Relay Outputs
• Status of Inputs, Outputs, and Alarms.
• Readings and Status of optional parameters (control, pharma, and auto-cycle)
• List of last twelve events
• Network configuration including IP address, subnet mask, gateway etc.
• Email configuration for alarm event notification

50 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

6 Configuration

6.1 Overview
Introduction
Configuration is a dedicated operation where you use straightforward keystroke
sequences to select and establish (configure) pertinent setup data best suited for your
application.
To assist you in the configuration process, there are prompts that appear in the Main
Setup menu and associated sub menus. These prompts let you know what group of
configuration data (Set Up prompts) you are working with and also, the specific
parameters associated with each group.

What’s in this section?

The topics in this section are listed below.

Topic See Page

6.1 Overview 51
6.2 UDA2182 Block Diagram 52
6.3 Main Setup Menu 53
6.4 Basic Configuration Procedure 55
6.6 Inputs Configuration 63
6.7 Outputs Configuration 74
6.8 Relays Configuration 75
6.9 Alarms Configuration 81
6.10 Monitors Configuration 83
6.11 Math Configuration 85
6.12 Logic Configuration 86
6.13 Auxiliary Configuration 89
6.14 PID Control Configuration 92
6.15 Auto Cycling Configuration 100
6.16 Variables Configuration 105
6.17 Communication Configuration 106
6.18 Maintenance Configuration 108

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 51

Configuration

6.2 UDA2182 Block Diagram

Overview

Analog PV Alarms
Input Temp (1-4) Relay
(1-2) (1-4)
Fault Time
Monitor Freq
(1-4) Relay
Digital Digital In
Input
(1-2) Math
(1-4) Output Fault
(1-3)
Calc Sum mA
A Logic
Values Diff
(Dual Input B (1-4)
Ratio
Devices)
% Passage A
% Rejection B Switch
(1-2)
SW

PV Func Gen
(1-2) Signal Connection Key
Analog Connection
PV PID Out
PV Connection
RSP (1-2)
PID Opt Alm 1 Digital Connection
FF
Installed Alm 2
RSP Select
Man Select

Figure 6-1 UDA2182 Block Diagram

52 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

6.3 Main Setup Menu

Accessing the Main Menu
Setup
Press . The main Menu will appear.

Setup
Inputs
Outputs
Relays
Alarms
Monitors
Math
Logic
Auxiliary
Control
PID Control*
Auto Cycling
Cycling*
Variables
Communication
Maintenance

*Some item are dependent on the Option selection

Menu Indicators
An upward-pointing arrow indicator above the menu at the left end of the header appears
when there are currently menu items above the screen accessible by moving the cursor
up.
A downward-pointing arrow indicator below the menu at the left end of the status footer
appears when there are currently menu items below the screen accessible by moving the
cursor down.
Use the keys.

Setup Group Overview

Refer to “General Rules for Editing” and Table 6-1 Basic Configuration Procedure to
configure the following Setup Groups.
Inputs Configuration (Table 6-5) – configure:
Input 1 and Input 2 for pH/ORP, pH Preamp, Conductivity, or Dissolved
Oxygen and associated parameters
Calc Value 1 and 2 (both units of measurement must be the same) select the
Calculation type [Ratio, sum, etc.], High range and Low range.
Outputs Configuration (Table 6-6) – configure Output 1, 2, or 3 source, % Range
High and Low and associated parameters
Relays Configuration (Table 6-7) – configure Relay 1, Relay 2, Relay 3, and
Relay 4 for Relay Types: Digital Out (Digital Output Relay), Time Prop (Time

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 53

Configuration

Proportional Output), Pulse Frequency (Pulse Frequency Type), Frequency Prop

(Frequency Proportional), or On/Off type and associated parameters.
Alarms Configuration ( Table 6-8) - configure Alarm 1 through 4 for Alarm’s
Source and associated parameters.
Monitors Configuration (Table 6-9) – configure Monitor 1 through 4 for
Monitor Type, Source and associated parameters.
Math Configuration (Table 6-10) – configure Math 1, 2, 3, and 4 for Input
Source, Math Type, and associated parameters.
Logic Configuration ( Table 6-11) – configure Logic 1, 2, 3, and 4 for Input
Sources, Type, and associated parameters.
Auxiliary Configuration (Table 6-12) – configure Switch 1, Switch 2, Function
Generator 1 and Function Generator 2(for pre-control linearizing of inputs) for
Sources and associated parameters.
PID Control (Option) Configuration (Table 6-13) – configure:
PID 1 and PID 2 Configuration parameters,
Tune (Enable Accutune, Fuzzy Logic, Use Prop Band, Use RPM, configure
Tuning parameters) and
Alarms Parameters (Setpoint types and Values, alarm hysteresis)
Auto Cycling (Table 6-16) – enable Auto Cycle 1 and 2 and set rinse schedule and
associated parameters. Auto cycling provides automated timing, control and
functionality for the cleaning and calibration of input probes.
Variables (Analog Table 6-3 and Digital Table 6-4) selections can be read and
written remotely using Modbus function codes. You are setting up the initial values
for the variables when power is applied to the UDA (Refer to Table 6-18 for an
Example)
Communication Configuration (Table 6-19) – configure IR Front Panel,
Modbus, RS485 and Ethernet.
Maintenance Configuration (Table 6-20) – Configure:
System - read the Software version, configured Language, selected Mains
Frequency, and PID Control Selections, enter a Password, and reset the Unit.
Input 1 and Input 2 - configure Input types, Conductivity units’ type, wire
size, and wire length, and temperature Units.
Display – setup the Main Display Header; and Clear Event and Cal Histories.
Tag Names – configure tag name strings for input names on single channel
main display, Auto Cycle display header, Pharma display header, PID display
header. Alarm names to appear in status and event history.
Clock - set real time clock date; time; date format; and time format.
Tests - run Display and Keyboard tests, read Output levels, and read Relay
States.

54 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

6.4 Basic Configuration Procedure

Introduction
Each of the Set Up groups and their functions are pre-configured at the factory.
If you want to change any of these selections or values, read the “General Rules for
Editing” and follow the procedure in Table 6-1. This procedure tells you the keys to press
to get to any Setup group and any associated parameter prompt.
6.4.1 General Rules for Editing
Selecting a parameter for edit:
• Display the screen containing the parameter.
• Use the keys to highlight the parameter name.
• Press Enter
to highlight the displayed current value.
Editing a parameter having a text string as an assigned value:
• Select the parameter as explained above.
• Use the keys to display other valid choices.
• When your choice is displayed, press Enter
to select.
Editing a parameter having a numeric value
• Select the parameter as explained above.
• Use the keys to move the cursor to the digit to be changed.
Moving the cursor left into leading spaces changes space to 0.
Moving the cursor right causes any leading 0 to change to a space.
If you hold down the key, the cursor will move to the left and increment
to the next highest digit available for the particular parameter. If you hold
down the key, the cursor will move to the right and increment the next
lowest digit available for the particular parameter.
• Use the keys to increment or decrement the numerical value at and to
the left of the digit. Increment/decrement past range limit displays limit
value and causes status message.
Use the keys to move the cursor to the next digit. Repeat.
When all digits have been changed, press Enter to store.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 55

Configuration

Basic Configuration Procedure

Table 6-1 Basic Configuration Procedure
Step Operation Press Result
1 Enter Set Up Setup
Mode Setup Inputs
Outputs
Relays
Alarms
Monitors
Math
Logic
Auxiliary
PID Control*
Control
Auto Cycling*
Cycling
Variables
Communication
Maintenance

The Main Menu is displayed.

Use to scroll and select a setup group (Example –
Inputs). The selection will be highlighted.
2 Enter Set Up The Setup group selected is shown at the top of the screen
Group Enter and will display all the selections within that group.
INPUTS
Input 1 Pre
pH/ORP
ph
Input 2 Conduc

Press to highlight the desired selection.

(Example – Input 1 PRE PH)
3 Enter the The list of parameters for that selection will be displayed.
selection Enter
(Example – Input 1 PRE PH)

INPUT 1 PRE PH
PV Type pH Glass
PV Range 0 - 14
Temp Input Enable
Temp Type 8550 O
Solu Temp Comp Custom
Solution pH/ °C 0.000

Press to highlight the desired selection.

4 Changing a The displayed current value for the parameter is displayed.
parameter Enter

5 Change the Depending on whether you are changing a text string or a

Value or numerical value, follow the “General Rules for Editing” in
Selection section 6.4.1 to make the changes.

56 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

6 Enter the Value Enters value or selection made into memory after another
or Selection Enter key is pressed.
Repeat the procedure for changing any parameter for any
group.
7 To Abort the Any changes made to a parameter value will revert to the
Changes Made Exit original value before editing.

8 Exit Setup Mode Until you see the main Setup screen.
Exit

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 57

Configuration

6.5 Analog and Digital Signal Sources

Overview
This section contains a list of signals that are available for connection as digital and
analog sources.
Table 6-2 Signal Sources
Signal Type Applies Source to: Selections
Analog Source Selections Alarms (PV) None
(Table 6-3) Outputs Input 1-2 PV
Math Blocks Input 1-2 Temp
Auxiliary - Function Generators Pharma Out 1-2
Monitor 1 through 4 Math 1-4
Auxiliary - Switch (A,B) Func Gen 1-2
Relays (Time Prop, Pulse Freq) Switch 1-2
PID (RSP Source, Feedforward Sum
Source) Difference
Ratio
%Passage
%Rejection
Cation Value
PIDout 1-2
AnlgVar 1-4

PV Source Selections PID 1 and 2 PV Source None

Function Generator 1 and 2 Input 1 – 2 PV

Digital Source Selections Logic (InA, InB) None

(Table 6-4) Relays (Digital Out, Pulse out) Alarm1-4
Auxiliary - Switch (Select B Alm Grp 1-2
Source) Monitor 1-4
Alarms Disable Logic 1-4
PID (Remote setpoint select, Digital In 1-2
Manual select) In 1-2 Fault
Auto Cycle – Start Source In 1-2 Hold
Out 1-3 Fault
Hold
Pharma 1-2 Fail
Pharma 1-2 Warn
PID 1 Alarm 1-2
PID 2 Alarm 1-2
Auto Cycle 1 – Extract, Rinse, Cal PT1,
Cal PT2, Fail
Auto Cycle 2 – Extract, Rinse, Cal PT1,
Cal PT2, Fail
Input 1-2 Cal
Output 1-3 Cal
DgtlVar 1-4

58 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Table 6-3 Analog Signal Sources

Analog Signal Description Definition
Input 1 PV Input 1 Process PV Source selection
Variable
Input 2 PV Input 2 Process PV Source selection
Variable
Input 1 Temp Input 1 Temperature Input 1 Temperature Selection
Input 2 Temp Input 2 Temperature Input 2 Temperature Selection
Pharma Out 1 Pharmacopoeia Input 1 Pharmacopia 1 Output (for Conductivity) = percent of USP
Output 1 stage limit
Output = 100 * pv in uScm / USP stage limit
Valid for Conductivity Input
Pharma Out 2 Pharmacopoeia Input 2 Pharmacopia 2 Output = percent of USP stage limit
Output 2
Output = 100 * pv in uScm / USP stage limit
Valid for Conductivity Input
Math 1 Math 1
Math 2 Math 2 Math selections can be connected to any Input PV, secondary
variable (Temperature), or Calculated Value. Math blocks include
Math 3 Math 3 scaling for the linear selection only.
See Table 6-10 for Math Configuration
Math 4 Math 4
Func Gen 1 Function Generator 1 Generates an output characteristic curve based on up to 11
configurable data points for both input (X) and output values (Y).
Func Gen 2 Function Generator 2 Part of the Auxiliary Configuration group.
See Table 6-12 for Function Generator Configuration
Switch 1 Switch 1 Switch selections have 2 input sources (A and B). A switch block is
used to select between two analog signals. The switch block can be
Switch 2 Switch 2 used for many monitor and control strategies. A Digital Signal Source
when active will select the B input source of the switch as the output.
Part of the Auxiliary Configuration group.
See Table 6-12 for Switch Configuration
Sum* Input 1 + Input 2
Difference* Input 1 – Input 2
Ratio* Input 1 / Input 2 The availability of calculated variables in the list of available sources
for alarms, math and control and for status display is determined by
%Passage* Min(Input 1 or 2) similarity of units of measure between the two input boards.
Max(Input 1 or 2)
*100
% Rejection* (1-Min(Input 1 or 2)/
Max(Input1 or 2))
*100
Cation Value pH Value Calculated pH value from differential conductivity
PID Out 1 PID Output 1 PID 1 Output in percent (0 to 100). Normally connected to a
proportional current (Current Type) or time proportional or frequency
proportional relay.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 59

Configuration

PID Out 2 PID Output 2 PID 2 Output in percent (0 to 100). Normally connected to a
proportional current (Current Type) or time proportional or frequency
proportional relay.
Anlg Var 1 Analog Variable 1 Initial values of Analog Variable 1 applied at power on.
Anlg Var 2 Analog Variable 2 Initial values of Analog Variable 2 applied at power on.
Anlg Var 3 Analog Variable 3 Initial values of Analog Variable 3 applied at power on.
Anlg Var 4 Analog Variable 4 Initial values of Analog Variable 4 applied at power on.

Table 6-4 Digital Signal Sources

Digital Signal Description Definition
Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Any Alarm 1 configuration. See Table 6-8 for Alarm configuration
Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Any Alarm 2 configuration. See Table 6-8 for Alarm configuration
Alarm 3 Alarm 3 Any Alarm 2 configuration. See Table 6-8 for Alarm configuration
Alarm 4 Alarm 4 Any Alarm 4 configuration. See Table 6-8 for Alarm configuration
Monitor 1 Monitor 1 Any Monitor 1 configuration. See Table 6-9 for Monitor configuration
Alarm Group 1 Alarm Group 1 Is the OR of the Alarm 1 - 4 signals. Will be TRUE when any Alarm 1 -
4 is TRUE.
If a single digital signal is needed to go TRUE for any alarm, OR alarm
group 1 and alarm group 2 together to create a logic signal.
Alarm Group 2 Alarm Group 2 Is the OR of the PID Control alarm signals. Will be TRUE when any
PID Control Alarm is TRUE.
If a single digital signal is needed to go TRUE for any alarm, OR alarm
group 1 and alarm group 2 together to create a logic signal.
Monitor 2 Monitor 2 Any Monitor 2 configuration. See Table 6-9 for Monitor configuration
Monitor 3 Monitor 3 Any Monitor 3 configuration. See Table 6-9 for Monitor configuration
Monitor 4 Monitor 4 Any Monitor 4 configuration. See Table 6-9 for Monitor configuration
Logic 1 Logic 1 Any Logic 1 configuration. See Table 6-11 for Logic configuration
Logic 2 Logic 2 Any Logic 2 configuration. See Table 6-11 for Logic configuration
Logic 3 Logic 3 Any Logic 3 configuration. See Table 6-11 for Logic configuration
Logic 4 Logic 4 Any Logic 4 configuration. See Table 6-11 for Logic configuration
Digital In 1 Digital Input 1 Digital Input 1 signal from Option Board (must be installed)
Digital In 2 Digital Input 2 Digital Input 2 signal from Option Board (must be installed)
In 1 Hold In 1 Hold Input is in Hold. This condition occurs either by pushing the HOLD
button on the front panel or when an Auto Cycle is being run.
In 2 Hold In 2 Hold
In 1 Fault Input 1 Fault Input open conditions. An input board disconnect while powered results
in an input fault condition and allows an alarm to be triggered.
In 2 Fault Input 2 Fault

60 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Out 1 Fault Output 1 Fault Output open conditions. This allows an alarm to be triggered if the
respective 4-20 mA output opens.
Out 2 Fault Output 2 Fault
Out 3 Fault Output 3 Fault
Hold Hold Engages Hold of Analog Inputs
Pharm 1 Warn Pharmacopoeia 1 The Pharma 1 Display ( Section 5.8) outputs digital Warning signal
Warning whenever the measured conductivity exceeds the Percent Warning
Value selected in the “Pharma Op Panel” on the Pharma Display
(Stage 1only)
Pharm 1 Fail Pharmacopoeia 1 The Pharma 1 Display ( Section 5.8) outputs digital Failure signal
Failure whenever one of the following conditions occur:
Stage 1 – Measured Conductivity exceeds 100%
Stage 1 – Temperature not within range of 0-100 degrees C
Stage 2 – Conductivity is 0.1 µS/cm or greater for 5 minutes
Stage 3 – pH not within range of 5 – 7pH
Stage 2 and 3 – Temperature not within range of 24 – 26 degrees C.
Pharm 2 Warn Pharmacopoeia 2 The Pharma 2 Display ( Section 5.8) outputs digital Warning signal
Warning whenever the measured conductivity exceeds the Percent Warning
Value selected in the “Pharma Op Panel” on the Pharma Display
(Stage 1only)
Pharm 2 Fail Pharmacopoeia 2 The Pharma 2 Display ( Section 5.8) outputs digital Failure signal
Failure whenever one of the following conditions occur:
Stage 1 – Measured Conductivity exceeds 100%
Stage 1 – Temperature not within range of 0-100 degrees C
Stage 2 – Conductivity is 0.1 µS/cm or greater for 5 minutes
Stage 3 – pH not within range of 5 – 7pH
Stage 2 and 3 – Temperature not within range of 24 – 26 degrees C.
PID 1 Alm 1 PID Control 1 Alarm 1 Control Alarms – See Table 6-15 PID Alarms
PID 1 Alm 2 PID Control 1 Alarm 2
PID 2 Alm 1 PID Control 2 Alarm 1
PID 2 Alm 2 PID Control 2 Alarm 2
AC 1 Extract Auto Cycle 1 Probe Auto Cycle 1 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
Extraction See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
AC 1 Rinse Auto Cycle 1 Probe Auto Cycle 1 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
Rinse See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
AC1 Cal Auto Cycle 1 Auto Cycle 1 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
Calibration Point 1 See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
AC 1 Cal 2 Auto Cycle 1 Auto Cycle 1 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
Calibration Point 2 See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
AC 1 Fail Auto Cycle 1 Failure Auto Cycle 1 Failure is active whenever an Auto Cycle 1 failure occurs
Auto Cycle 1digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
AC 2 Extract Auto Cycle 2 Probe Auto Cycle 2 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
Extraction See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
AC 2 Rinse Auto Cycle 2 Probe Auto Cycle 2 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
Rinse See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
AC 2 Cal Auto Cycle 2 Auto Cycle 2 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
Calibration Point 1 See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 61

Configuration

AC 2 Cal 2 Auto Cycle 2 Auto Cycle 2 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
Calibration Point 2 See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
AC 2 Fail Auto Cycle 2 Failure Auto Cycle 2 Failure is active whenever an Auto Cycle 2 failure occurs
Auto Cycle 2 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
Input 1 Cal Input 1 Calibration This signal goes TRUE when the calibration factor for input 1 is being
calculated. The TRUE state is active for less than one second.
Input 2 Cal Input 2 Calibration This signal goes TRUE when the calibration factor for input 2 is being
calculated. The TRUE state is active for less than one second.
Output 1 Cal Output 1 Calibration The signal indicates when the Output 1 calibration values are being
changed. The signal goes TRUE when the “4ma Offset” or “20ma
Offset” is being modified. The signal goes FALSE when the value is
entered.
Output 2 Cal Output 2 Calibration The signal indicates when the Output 2 calibration values are being
changed. The signal goes TRUE when the “4ma Offset” or “20ma
Offset” is being modified. The signal goes FALSE when the value is
entered.
Output 3 Cal Output 3 Calibration The signal indicates when the Output 3 calibration values are being
changed. The signal goes TRUE when the “4ma Offset” or “20ma
Offset” is being modified. The signal goes FALSE when the value is
entered.
DgtlVar 1 Digital Variable 1 Initial values of Digital Variable 1 applied at power on.
DgtlVar 2 Digital Variable 2 Initial values of Digital Variable 2 applied at power on.
DgtlVar 3 Digital Variable 3 Initial values of Digital Variable 3 applied at power on.
DgtlVar 4 Digital Variable 4 Initial values of Digital Variable 4 applied at power on.

62 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

6.6 Inputs Configuration

Overview
This group lets you select pH/ORP, Preamp pH, Conductivity, or Dissolved Oxygen
Input type and the associated output parameters.

Accessing Inputs Menu

Setup
Press to display the Main menu.
Enter
Use the keys to select “Inputs” then press to enter the sub-menus.
Input 1 and Input 2 – Direct pH/ORP, Preamp pH, Conductivity, or Dissolved Oxygen
are available for selection. Select PV type, read the range, select Temp Type, Solution
Temp Compensation, Bias, Failsafe and Filter Time.

For Dissolved Oxygen, also select the Salinity type and Pressure type.
Enter
Press to highlight the desired menu selection then press to display the group of
parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – ”General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-5 Input Configuration
Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition
selection Range of
Setting

Input 1 or 2 PV Type pH Glass The PV type determines the numerical format and the
Direct pH pH HPW units of measure on the online PV display. Measured
pH Durafet PV is generally displayed in the highest decimal
ORP (default) precision possible to .001 and has a potentially
ORP displayable range of 0.000 to 99999. The exceptions
are dissolved oxygen, pH, ORP and temperature,
which are displayed with fixed decimal precision. PV
Type determines specific ranges.
PV Range 0.0 to 14.0 pH Read Only
-1600 to 1600
ORP
Temp Input Enable Enable to allow “Temp Type” selection – see below.
(ORP only) Disable
Temp Type 8550Ω Therm 8550Ω Thermistor
(default)
1000Ω RTD 1000Ω Resistance Temperature Detector
Manual Manual

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 63

Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition

selection Range of
Setting
Temp Deg F or C 14.0 to 230.0ºF Temp Deg F or C will appear depending on what
(Temp Type = default = 77ºF Temperature Unit was selected in “Maintenance”
Manual) setup group, parameter “Temp Units”.
-10 to 110ºC
default = 25ºC
Solu Temp Comp None (default)
Custom Enter “Solution pH/ºC” value
(Not ORP) H20 Pure Water
NH3 Ammonia
Phosphate Phosphate
Morpholine Morpholine
Solution pH/ºC 0.000 (default) Measured pH is displayed and transmitted normalized
to to a solution temperature of 25°C as determined by
(Solu Temp -0.050 the current Solution Temperature Coefficient. This is
Comp = Custom) expressed in units of pH/°C with precision to the
(Not ORP) hundredths decimal place. The parameter “Solu Temp
Coeff” allows the selection of the following entries.
Follow the “General Rules for Editing” in section
6.4.1 to make the changes. (-) Will appear when first
digit to the right of decimal point is changed.
Solution Type Temp Coefficient
None (Default) 0.000

H2O (Pure Water) -0.016

NH3 (Ammonia) -0.032

PO4 (Phosphate) -0.032

C4H9NO (Morpholine) -0.032

Custom User Entry

PV Bias -99999 to PV Bias Constant - is used to compensate the input

99999 for drift of an input value.
default = 0.00
Failsafe -99999 to The output value to which the output will go to protect
99999 against the effects of failure of the equipment.
default = 14.00
Filter Time 0 to 120 A software digital filter is provided for dampening the
default = 0 process noise. This filter is applied before the limit
functions.

64 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition

selection Range of
Setting

Input 1 or 2 The pH Preamp input card measures pH and accepts inputs from a Durafet series Preamp, a
Preamp pH glass Meredian II Preamp or a Durafet series Cap Adapter. The pH Preamp input is similar to
the pH/ORP input shown previously and has an identical Setup/Inputs parameter menu with
the following important differences:
No ORP measurement. ORP is not selectable as a PV Type in Setup/Inputs.
No HPW measurement. HPW is not selectable as a PV Type in Setup/Inputs.
The parameter “Temperature Input” is available for either Durafet or Glass PV type to enable
or disable. A temperature input disable accommodates preamps that do not transmit
measured temperature from the probe. This will disable all monitored temperature values,
temperature input diagnostics and faults and the parameter “Solution Temp Comp” under
Setup/Inputs/pH Preamp n.
You need to disable “Temperature Input” for Durafet from External Preamp.
PV Type pH Glass The PV type determines the numerical format and the
pH HPW units of measure on the online PV display. Measured
pH Durafet PV is generally displayed with fixed decimal precision.
(default)
PV Range 0.0 to 14.0 pH Read Only

Temp Input Enable Enable to allow “Temp Type” selection – see below.
Disable
(default)
Temp Type 8550Ω Therm 8550Ω Thermistor
(default)
(Temp Input =
1000Ω RTD 1000Ω Resistance Temperature Detector
Enable)
Manual Manual
Temp Deg F or C 14.0 to 230.0ºF Temp Deg F or C will appear depending on what
(Temp Input = default = 77ºF Temperature Unit was selected in “Maintenance”
Enable, Temp setup group, parameter “Temp Units”.
Type = Manual) -10 to 110ºC
default = 25ºC
Solu Temp Comp None (default)
Custom Enter “Solution pH/ºC” value
(Temp Input = H20 Pure Water
Enable) NH3 Ammonia
Phosphate Phosphate
Morpholine Morpholine

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 65

Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition

selection Range of
Setting
Solution pH/ºC 0.0 (default) to Measured pH is displayed and transmitted normalized
-0.050 pH/ºC to a solution temperature of 25°C as determined by
(Temp Input = the current Solution Temperature Coefficient. This is
Enable, Solu expressed in units of pH/°C with precision to the
Temp Comp = hundredths decimal place. The parameter “Solu Temp
Custom) Coeff” allows the selection of the following entries.
Follow the “General Rules for Editing” in section
6.4.1 to make the changes. (-) Will appear when first
digit to the right of decimal point is changed.
Solution Type Temp Coefficient
None (Default) 0.000

H2O (Pure Water) -0.016

NH3 (Ammonia) -0.032

PO4 (Phosphate) -0.032

C4H9NO (Morpholine) -0.032

Custom User Entry

PV Bias -99999.00 to PV Bias Constant - is used to compensate the input

99999.00 for drift of an input value.
default = 0.00
Failsafe -99999.00 to The output value to which the output will go to protect
99999.00 against the effects of failure of the equipment.
default = 14.00
Filter Time 0 to 120 A software digital filter is provided for dampening the
default = 0.0 process noise. This filter is applied before the limit
functions.

66 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition

selection Range of
Setting

Input 1 or For every cell constant the PV type includes selections for both conductivity µS/cm and
Input 2 conductivity mS/cm.
Conductivity Conductivity µS/cm displays µS/cm and provides standard range solution type selections:
None, NaCl, Morpholine, HCL, Acid, and NH3.
Conductivity mS/cm displays mS/cm and provides wide range solution type selections: None,
HCl, NaCl, H2SO4, and NaOH.
Upper range limit defaults according to the table below:
For every cell constant the PV type also includes selections for either TDS ppb/TDS ppm or
TDS ppm/TDS ppt.:
TDS ppb/ppm provides standard or wide solution type selections and
TDS ppm/ppt provides standard or wide solution type selections. Solution selections are the
same as above with the exception of None.
Upper range limit defaults according to the table below:
Cell Const 0.01 Cell Const 0. 1 Cell Const 1 Cell Const 10 Cell Const 25 Cell Const 50

0 - 2 µS/cm 0 - 20 µS/cm 0 - 200 µS/cm 0 - 2000 0 - 20000 0 - 20000

displayable to 200 displayable to displayable to µS/cm µS/cm µS/cm
µS/cm 2000 µS/cm 20000 µS/cm displayable to displayable to displayable to
0 - 0.2 mS/cm 0 - 2 mS/cm 0 - 20 mS/cm 99999 µS/cm 99999 µS/cm 99999 µS/cm
0 - 200 mS/cm 0 - 500 mS/cm 0 - 1000
0 - 2000 ppb TDS 0 - 20000 ppb 0 - 200 ppm
mS/cm
TDS TDS 0 - 2000 ppm 0 - 10 % conc
0 - 200 ppm TDS
TDS displayable to 0 - 20 % conc
0 - 2000 ppm TDS 0 - 20 ppt TDS
20%
0 - 200 ppt
TDS

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 67

Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition

selection Range of
Setting
PV Type Cond μS/cm These selections are only available with regard to the
(NIST-default)+ Cell Constant selected (See “Cell Constant”).
Select Cell
Cond mS/cm – Cell Available Selectable PV Types
Constant First
(NIST) Constant
Concentrtn Use the keys to select
TDS ppb 0.01 Conductance μS/cm (default- NIST), Conductance
TDS ppm mS/cm (NIST), Conductance mS/m(default - ISO),
TDS ppt Conductance S/m (ISO), TDS ppb, TDS ppm,
Resistivity, Conductance μS/m (ISO)
Resistivity
0.1 Conductance μS/cm (default- NIST), Conductance
Cond mS/m (Default) mS/cm (NIST), Conductance mS/m(default - ISO),
(ISO-Default)+ Conductance S/m (ISO), TDS ppb, TDS ppm,
Cond S/m – Resistivity, Conductance μS/m (ISO)
(ISO) 1 Conductance μS/cm (default- NIST), Conductance
Concentrtn mS/cm (NIST), Conductance mS/m(default - ISO),
TDS ppb Conductance S/m (ISO), TDS ppm, TDS ppt,
TDS ppm
10 Conductance μS/cm (default- NIST), Conductance
TDS ppt mS/cm (NIST), Conductance mS/m(default - ISO),
Resistivity Conductance S/m (ISO), TDS ppm, TDS ppt.
Cond μS/m
25 Concentration (default), Conductance μS/cm
(default- NIST), Conductance mS/cm (NIST),
Conductance mS/m(default - ISO), Conductance
+ S/m (ISO),
parameter
selected in 50 Concentration (default), Conductance μS/cm
MAINTENANCE (default- NIST), Conductance mS/cm (NIST),
Æ INPUTS menu Conductance mS/m(default - ISO), Conductance
S/m (ISO),

PV Range Read Only

Cell Constant * 0.01 The Cell Constant is a value specific to a category of
0.1 (default) cells for the measurement range required.
1
10
25
50
Cal Factor * 0.850 to 1.150 The Cal Factor is a correction value applied to the
default = 1.000 cell’s Cell Constant, which is unique to each cell to
take into account tolerances in manufacture.

If a standard cell is attached to the sensor, the Cell

Constant defaults to “0.1” and the Cal Factor
defaults to “1.000”. These standard cell parameter
values are editable and are retained through a
power cycle.
*Cell Constant and Cal Factor are automatically uploaded from Honeywell conductivity cells
with EEPROM (blue & brown leads) and these values cannot be edited.

68 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition

selection Range of
Setting
TDS Factor 0.010 The TDS Factor is a conversion value applied to
(only PV Type 1.000(default) conductivity to derive total dissolved solids, in units of
TDS) 2.000 ppm per μS/cm.
Temp Type 8550Ω Therm 8550Ω Thermistor
(default)
1000Ω RTD 1000Ω Resistance Temperature Detector
Manual Manual
Temp Deg C or F -10.0 to If “Manual” is selected at “Temp Type” -Temp Deg F
140.0ºC or C will appear depending on what Temperature Unit
was selected in “Maintenance” setup group,
14 to 284ºF parameter “Temp Units”.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 69

Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition

selection Range of
Setting
Solu Temp Comp None Measured Conductivity and Resistivity can optionally
Custom be temperature compensated to 25°C for a specific
H20 solution type. TDS and concentration are always
NH3 measured based on a specific solution type. The cell
PO4 constant and measurement type determines which
C4H9NO solution types are available for selection, according to
HCl the table below:
NaCl (default)
Cell Available Selectable Solution Types
H2SO4 Constant
NaOH Use the keys to select

0.01 None (Conductivity/Resistivity only),

NaCl (μS/cm, mS/cm, TDS ppb, TDS ppm ),
NH3 (μS/cm, TDS ppb, TDS ppm ),
C4H9NO (μS/cm, TDS ppb, TDS ppm ),
H2SO4;HCL;NaOH (mS/cm)

0.1 None (Conductivity/Resistivity only),

(Default) NaCl(μS/cm, mS/cm, TDS ppb, TDS ppm ),
NH3(μS/cm, TDS ppb, TDS ppm ),
C4H9NO (μS/cm, TDS ppb, TDS ppm ),
H2SO4;HCL;NaOH (mS/cm)

1 None (Conductivity only),

NaCl (μS/cm, mS/cm, TDS ppm, TDS ppt ),
NH3 (μS/cm, TDS ppm ),
C4H9NO (μS/cm, TDS ppm ),
H2SO4;HCL;NaOH (mS/cm, TDS ppt)

10 None (Conductivity only),

NaCl (μS/cm, mS/cm, TDS ppm, TDS ppt ),
NH3 (μS/cm, TDS ppm ),
C4H9NO (μS/cm, TDS ppm ),
H2SO4;HCL;NaOH (mS/cm, TDS ppt)

25 None (Conductivity only),

HCl (mS/cm, Concentration),
NaCl (μS/cm, mS/cm, Concentration),
H2SO4 (mS/cm, Concentration),
NaOH (mS/cm, Concentration)

50 None (Conductivity only),

HCl (mS/cm, Concentration),
NaCl (μS/cm, mS/cm, Concentration),
H2SO4 (mS/cm, Concentration),
NaOH (mS/cm, Concentration)

Wire Len Feet + 0 to 1000 ft Refer to appendix 15.2 to enter values for lead wire
default = 0 resistance compensation
Wire Len Meters + 0 to 304.80
default = 0

70 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition

selection Range of
Setting
Wire Size AWG + 16 AWG
18
AWG(default)
20 AWG
22 AWG
Wire Size Sq mm + 0.33 to 2.08
default = 0.82
Pharma Type None PhEur - Pharmacopoeia Europa
PhEur
USP USP - United States Pharmacopoeia

default = None standard procedure stages for determining Purified

Water
Pharma PV High -99999.00 to Pharma PV High Value – Measured solution
99999.00 conductivity value scaled for 100%
(default
10.000)
Pharma PV Low -99999.00 to Pharma PV Low Value - Measured solution
99999.00 conductivity value scaled for 0%
(default 0.000)
Pharm Tmr Mins 000.0 to 120.0 Pharma Timer Minutes - If the Pharma sample does
(default not pass the Stage 1 conductivity requirement a Fail
10.000) signal is generated, then the State 2 and Stage 3
tests are conducted. When the Stage 2 or Stage 3 test
is successful, the fail signal is cancelled and the
Pharma Timer begins to count down from the
configured minutes value set here. When the Timer
countdown is completed, the Pharma function block
returns to Stage 1.
PV Bias -9999.00 to PV Bias Constant - is used to compensate the input
9999.00 for drift of an input value.
default = 0.000
Failsafe 0.0 to 2000 The output value to which the output will go to protect
default = against the effects of failure of the equipment.
2000.000
Filter Time 0 to 120.0 A software digital filter is provided for dampening the
default = 0.000 process noise and is applied before the limit functions.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 71

Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition

selection Range of
Setting

Input 1 or PV Type DO% Sat The concentration of oxygen dissolved in water (or
Input 2 other liquid) may be described by either “dissolved
DO Concen
DO oxygen (DO) concentration” or percent saturation.
(default)
The units for DO are either parts per million - PPM
Dissolved (equivalent to milligrams per liter) or parts per billion -
Oxygen PPB (equivalent to micrograms per liter). The units of
saturation are percent where 100% saturation is
equivalent to the concentration of oxygen dissolved in
air-saturated water. For instance, at 25°C and one
atmosphere pressure, 8.24 ppm = 100% saturation.
Although the ppm and ppb concentration units are the
most frequently used units by far, % saturation may
be appropriate for non-aqueous liquids like vegetable
oil.
PV Range 0 – 200 ppb, Read Only
displayable to
20000ppb
0-20 ppm
0 – 100% sat,
displayable to
200% sat
Temp Type 5000Ω Therm 5000Ω Thermistor
Default
1000Ω RTD 1000Ω Resistance Temperature Detector
Manual Manual
Temp Deg C or F 0 to 60ºC Temp Deg F or C will appear depending on what
(Temp Type = Temperature Unit was selected in “Maintenance”
Manual) 32 to 140ºF setup group, parameter “Temp Units”.
Salinity Type Salinity is used to correct for salt in the process water.
Manual Manual
(default)
Conduc Input Valid only if conductivity board is present.
Salinity ppt 0.00 to (parts per thousand) as sodium chloride
40.00ppt
“Manual” Salinity 0.0 = No selection
type only default = 0.00
Pressure Type Manual Allows manual entry of atmospheric pressure
compensation
Sensor Internal sensor for atmospheric pressure
(default) compensation during air calibration
Pressure mm Hg 500.0 to 800.0 Atmospheric pressure compensation.
Enter a value in mmHg.
(Manual Pressure default = 760
type only) mmHg

72 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition

selection Range of
Setting
PV Bias PV Bias Constant - is used to compensate the input
for drift of an input value.
-20.00 to 20.00 If PPM Board is installed.
PPM
-20000 to If PPB Board is installed.
20000 PPB
default = 0.000
Failsafe The output value to which the output will go to protect
against the effects of failure of the equipment.
0.000 to 20.00 If PPM Board is installed.
PPM
0.000 to 20000 If PPB Board is installed.
PPB
default =
20.000
Filter Time 0 to 120.0 A software digital filter is provided for dampening the
process. The units are in time constant seconds.
default = 0.0

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 73

Configuration

6.7 Outputs Configuration

Overview
This group lets you select the signal that will be transmitted.
Accessing Outputs Menu
• Press Setup
to display the Main menu.
• Use the keys to select “Outputs” then press Enter to enter the sub-menu.
• Output 1, Output 2, or Output 3 and their associated parameters are available
for selection.
• Press to highlight the desired menu selection then press Enter
to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 - General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-6 Outputs Configuration
Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range Parameter Definition
selection of Setting

Output 1 Source Any Analog Signal Process Variable Source - Selects the signal
Output 2 See Table 6-3 that will be transmitted.
Output 3
See Note 1 for units.
High Range -99999.00 to 99999.00 High Range Value - value of input that
corresponds to 100 % output value.
See Note 1 for units.
Low Range -99999.00 to 99999.00 Low Range Value - value of input that
corresponds to 0 % output value.
See Note 1 for units.
Slew Time 0.000 to 999.00 Slew Time is the maximum rate of change
in seconds required to drive the output from full OFF (0% -
default = 0.000 typically 4 mA) to full ON (100% - typically
20mA).
mA Range High 0 to 20 Value of mA output that corresponds to 100 %
default = 20 output signal (for example: 20 mA).
mA Range Low 0 to 20 Value of mA output that corresponds to 0 %
default = 4 output signal (for example: 4 mA).
mA Limit High 0 to 21 Value of mA that you want to set the High
default = 21 Range Limit.
mA Limit Low 0 to 21 Value of mA that you want to set the Low
default = 3 Range Limit.

74 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

NOTE 1.
The entries for any parameter are in the units of that parameter.
For example:
Parameters in engineering units.
Input 1 PV
Input 1 Temp
Input 2 PV
Input 2 Temp
Pharma Out 1
Pharma Out 2

Parameters in %
Control 1
Control 2
Math 1,2,3,4
Output 1,2,3

So in the SETUP OUTPUT menu, for the SOURCE and Hi Range and Low Range
values, these look at the units of that source.
If retransmitting a pH input, the Hi Range and Low Range values would normally be set
to 14 pH and 0 pH. (14 pH= 100% output, and 0 pH = 0% output.)
But if the output is to go to a valve, to open the valve or operate a pump through a range
of 0-100% open, and has a SOURCE of CONTROL 1, then the units of the
CONTROL 1 output is in units of %, so in the SETUP OUTPUT menu, the High Range
and Low Range would be in % units.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 75

Configuration

6.8 Relays Configuration

Overview
Programming the relays consists of selecting the relay type, identifying the input
parameter, which activates the relay and selecting whether the relay is energized when
the input parameter is on or off. The Relay group lets you select a relay type for up to
four relays. When planning relay operation, it is wise to consider the state of the relay
when power is not applied to the UDA. The invert parameter of the relay configuration is
helpful in assuring that the Off device state is consistent with the relay normal operation.
Each relay output can be independently configured to be one of four basic types:
A Digital Output Relay allows connection to any Alarm, Alarm Group, Monitor, Logic,
Digital Input, Input Fault, Output Fault, Hold Key, Pharm Warn, Pharm Fail, Control
Alarms, Input 1 and 2 Rinse and Cal Pts, Cycle on or fail.
Time proportional output is a form of a process variable transmitter or control output
that pulses the relay as a pulse width modulated signal that is proportional to the input
signal over a configured input range. The Time Proportional cycle time is configurable
between 0.1 and 999 seconds while the duty cycle is directly proportional to the selected
input signal.
Frequency proportional output is a form of a process variable transmitter or control
output that pulses the relay as a pulse rate that is proportional to the input signal over a
configured input range. The maximum frequency is set by the cycle time that is
configurable between 0.1 and 999 seconds. The pulse duration is fixed and configured in
seconds by an on time parameter.
On / Off output relay turns On when the input is greater than the high and low ranges
and turns off when the input is less than the high and low ranges. This allows an on / off
control action with an adjustable dead band. The On state is controlled by a cycle time
and on duration parameters such to achieve a selectable output proportion. An invert
parameter is available to allow inverse action such that the relay will cycle ON when
below the low range limit.
Pulse Output relay will provide a fixed duty cycle when the applied input signal is ON.
The cycle time and pulse duration are configurable parameters. The relay will be OFF
when the applied input is OFF. An inverse parameter allows the input to be inverted for
reverse behavior.

Accessing Relays Menu

Setup
• Press to display the Main menu.
Enter
• Use the keys to select “Relays” then press to enter the sub-menu.
• Relay 1, Relay 2, Relay 3 or Relay 4 and their associated parameters are
available for selection.

76 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

• Press to highlight the desired menu selection then press Enter

to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-7 Relays Configuration
Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range Parameter Definition
selection of Setting

Relay Types Type Digital Out Digital Output Relay (default)

Set relay Time Prop Time Proportional Output Relay
types first
Freq Prop Frequency Proportional Output

On/Off On / Off control relay

Pulse Out Pulse Output

Relay 1 A Digital Output Relay allows connection to any Alarm, Control Alarm, Logic, Alarm Event,
Relay 2 Hold, Input or Output Fault, or Digital Input.
Relay 3
Source Any Digital Signal Digital Source
Relay 4 See Table 6-4

Digital Output Invert Enable Inverts the input state of the applied digital input
Relay Disable (default) such that inverse relay operation is achieved

Relay 1 Time proportional output is a form of a process variable transmitter or control output that
Relay 2 pulses the relay as a pulse width modulated signal that is proportional to the input signal over
Relay 3 a configured input range. The Time Proportional cycle time is configurable between 0.1 and
Relay 4 999 seconds while the duty cycle is directly proportional to the selected input signal.
Source Any Analog Signal PV Source
Time See Table 6-3
Proportional
Output Relay High Range -99999 to 99999 The high range is the PV based engineering unit
default = 100.00 value configured as the value that will produce a
100 percent (always active) duty cycle.
Low Range -99999 to 99999 The low range is the PV based engineering unit
default = 0.00 value configured as the value that will produce a
0 percent (always inactive) duty cycle.
Invert Enable Inverts the proportional range of the applied
Disable (default) analog input such that inverse relay operation is
achieved.
Cycle Time 0 to 999 seconds Cycle time is that time period, in seconds, the
default = 10 relay will be activated.
Min Off Time 0 to 15 Minimum off is that time period, in seconds, the
default = 0 relay will be activated.
Min On Time 0 to 15 Minimum On is that time period, in seconds, the
default = 0 relay will be activated.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 77

Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range Parameter Definition

selection of Setting
Relay 1 Frequency proportional output is a form of a process variable transmitter or control output
Relay 2 that pulses the relay as a pulse rate that is proportional to the input signal over a configured
Relay 3 relay range. The maximum frequency is set by the cycle time that is configurable between
Relay 4 0.1 and 999 seconds. The pulse duration is fixed and configured in seconds by an on time
parameter.
Frequency
Source Any Analog Signal PV Source
Proportional See Table 6-3
Output Relay
High Range -99999 to 99999 The high range is the PV based engineering unit
default = 100.00 value configured as the value that will produce a
100 percent (Maximum Frequency) duty cycle.
Low Range -99999 to 99999 The low range is the PV based engineering unit
default = 0.00 value configured as the value that will produce a
0 percent (always inactive) duty cycle.
Invert Enable Inverts the proportional range of the applied
Disable (default) analog input such that inverse relay operation is
achieved.
Cycle Time 0 to 999 Sets the Cycle Time of the maximum output
default = 10 frequency.
Max Freq=1/Cycle Time
Freq Output = Max Freq * (% Input/100)
For example:
Freq Output (100%)=Max Freq * 1
Freq Ouput (50%)= Max Freq * .5
Freq Ouput (25%)=Max Freq * .25
On Time 0.0 to 999 Sets the pulse duration. This value should be
default = 5 less than the cycle time for proper operation.
Typically this value is used to control the pulse
duration for the finial output control element.

78 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range Parameter Definition

selection of Setting
Relay 1 On / Off output relay turns On when the input is greater than the relay high and low ranges
Relay 2 and turns off when the input is less than the relay high and low ranges. This allows an on /
Relay 3 off control action with an adjustable dead band. The On state is controlled by a cycle time
Relay 4 and on duration parameters such to achieve a selectable output proportion. An invert
parameter is available to allow inverse action such that the relay will cycle ON when below
ON/OFF the low range limit.
Control Relay
Source Any Analog Signal PV Source
See Table 6-3

High Range -99999 to 99999 The high range is the PV based engineering unit
default = 100.00 value configured as the value that will produce a
100 percent (Maximum Frequency) duty cycle.
Low Range -99999 to 99999 The low range is the PV based engineering unit
default = 0.00 value configured as the value that will produce a
0 percent (always inactive) duty cycle.
Invert Enable Inverts the proportional range or input state of
Disable (default) the applied digital or analog input such that
inverse relay operation is achieved.
Cycle Time 0 to 999 Cycle time is that time period, in seconds,
default = 10 between relay activations.
On Time 0,0 to 999 Sets the pulse duration. This value should be
default = 5 less than the cycle time for proper operation.
Typically this value is used to control the pulse
duration for the finial output control element.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 79

Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range Parameter Definition

selection of Setting
Relay 1 Pulse Output relay will provide a fixed duty cycle when the applied input signal is ON. The
Relay 2 cycle time and pulse duration are configurable parameters. The relay will be OFF when the
Relay 3 applied input is OFF. An inverse parameter allows the input to be inverted for reverse
Relay 4 behavior.
Source Any Digital Signal PV Source
Pulse Output See Table 6-4
Control Relay
Invert Enable The digital output relays "invert" parameter can
Disable (default) be used to allow direct (invert disabled) or
reverse (invert enabled) control actuation.
Cycle Time 0 to 999 Cycle time is that time period, in seconds,
default = 10.0 between relay activations.
On Time 0 to 999 The time in seconds that the relay is On during each
default = 5.0 cycle when the input to the Pulse Output is ON. When
the Input to the Pulse output is OFF the relay is not
activated.

80 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

6.9 Alarms Configuration

Overview
Alarm 1 through 4
Alarm selections can be connected to any Analog Signal (Table 6-3 Analog Signal
Sources). Each alarm supports a setpoint type and value.
Alarm selections generate front panel alerts, support latching/acknowledge, with on delay
timers. Select any Digital signal (Table 6-4 Digital Signal Sources) to disable the Alarm

Example: Using Math, Switch and Monitor blocks to achieve auto range functions
This example shows how to use the math blocks to scale the output in multiple ranges
and uses a monitor and switch to select the desired amplification for the input. A relay is
connected in parallel to the switch to provide an indication as to which range is currently
being transmitted.
Range Switch using Math, Monitor, and Switch Blocks

Math 1
X (x – low range) \ Switch 1
Output 1
(high range – low
range) InA
InB
SW
Math 2
(x – low range) \
(high range – low
range)
Relay 1
Monitor 1
High, SP = V

Output 1
100

Monitor 1
Hysterisis

Math 2 Math 1 Monitor 1 Math 1 Math 2 x

Low Low SP High High
Range Range High Range Range

Relay 1

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 81

Configuration

Accessing Alarms Menu

• Press Setup
to display the Main menu.
• Use the keys to select “Alarms” then press Enter
to enter the sub-menu.
• Press to highlight the desired menu selection then press Enter
to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-8 Alarms Configuration
Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition
selection Range of Setting

Alarm 1 Source Any Analog Signal Process Variable Source – Process Variable to be
Alarm 2 See Table 6-3 monitored by the alarm.
Alarm 3 Disable Any Digital Signal Select any Digital signal to disable the Alarm
Alarm 4 See Table 6-4

Type High (default) Alarm actions may be High or Low.

Low
Setpoint Value -99999 to 99999.9 Setpoint value in engineering units
in Engineering
Units
default = 0.000
Latch Disable (default) When enabled, the alarm is latch ON until
Enable acknowledged from the Alarm Status display.
Hysteresis 0.0 to 99999.9 in Hysteresis - A user-specified hysteresis value in
engineering units the engineering units of the process variable
default = 0.000 source is provided. Hysteresis in engineering
units can be set from 0 to the input span of the
monitored variable.
On Delay 0 to 120 seconds An on-delay time value up to 120 seconds is
default = 0.000 available to prevent momentary alarm actions.
Number of seconds the alarm is active before
activating the Output.

82 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

6.10 Monitors Configuration

Overview
Monitor 1, 2, 3, and 4
A Monitor Block is used to determine when a process value is greater or less than a
specified setpoint. Monitor blocks can be used for ON/OFF type control or, in
conjunction with switch and math blocks to change process gain based upon control
regions. The Monitor block provides a hysteresis value limit output transitions near the
set point value. The Monitor block can be configured as either a High or Low Monitor
type. There are four monitor blocks provided for general use.
Unlike Alarms, Monitor blocks do not create an event in the event history, nor do they
cause a status message to appear on the display.
Accessing Monitors Menu
• Press Setup to display the Main menu.
• Use the keys to select “Monitors” then press Enter to enter the sub-menu.
• Press to highlight the desired Monitor selection then press Enter to display
the group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-9 Monitors Configuration
Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition
selection Range of Setting
Monitor 1 Monitor Type High (default) Alarm actions may be High or Low.
Monitor 2 Low (See NOTE 2 on next page)
Monitor 3
Source Any Analog Signal Analog Signal Source – Process signal to be
Monitor 4 See Table 6-3 monitored by the Alarm. Any analog source such
as PV, Temperature, Pharma, Math, Function
Generator, Switch, PID, or Calculated Values*

* units of measure between the two input boards must

be similar

Setpoint Value 0 to 99999.9 in Setpoint Value in Engineering Units used for

Engineering Units activation of the output based upon the monitor
default = 0.000 type
Hysteresis 0.0 to 99999.9 in Hysteresis - A user-specified hysteresis value in
engineering units the engineering units of the process variable
default = 0.000 source is provided. Hysteresis in engineering
units can be set from 0 to the input span of the
monitored variable.
On Delay 0 to 999 seconds An on-delay time value up to 999 seconds is
default = 0.0 available to prevent momentary alarm actions.
Number of seconds the alarm is active before
activating the Output.

See Notes on next page

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 83

Configuration

NOTE 2: For High Monitor

If Input greater than setpoint Output = ON
else if Input less than set point – hysteresis, Output = OFF
else Output is unchanged

For Low Monitor

If Input less than setpoint Output = ON
else if Input greater than set point + hysteresis, Output = OFF
else Output is unchanged

84 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

6.11 Math Configuration

Overview
The Math group has four Math selections (Math 1, Math 2, Math 3, and Math 4). Math
selections can be connected to any Analog Signal source (Table 6-3). Math blocks
include scaling for the linear selection only.
The Math Block can also be used for proportional control over the math blocks
configured range for control of any Input PV, Temperature, or calculated values by
connecting it to a current output, TPO relay, or FPO relay. Since multiple outputs can
share a common math block, the output range of a math block can be split over multiple
outputs or relays with each output or proportional relay using a specific portion of the %
output range of the math block.

Accessing Math Menu

• Press Setup
to display the Main menu.
• Use the keys to select “Math” then press Enter
to enter the sub-menu.
• Press to highlight the desired menu selection then press Enter
to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 85

Configuration

Table 6-10 Math Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition
Range of
Setting

Math 1 Type Linear (default) Provide a linear output with Gain and Offset with digital
Math 2 filtering.
Math 3
Math 4 Output = Filter (Gain * (Input) + Offset)
Linear is simple linear scale used to retransmit the PV
using the High Range as scaled 100% output and the
Low Range is the scaled to 0% output. There is no
restriction on the High and Low ranges. Setting the
high range to a value less than the low range will invert
the action of the math output. Limit out has no effect on
the output.
Log Log (base 10):
Output = Log(Input): Input > 10^-10
Output = -10 Input <= 10^-10 Output Block Low
Range=Log(Input low value)
Sq Root Square Root:
Output = SqRoot(Input). Input > 0
Output = 0 Input < 0
Abs Value Absolute Value
If Input >= 0 then Output = Input
If Input < 0 then Output = -Input
Any Analog Signal Analog Signal Source – Process signal to be monitored
See Table 6-3 by the Alarm. Any analog source such as PV,
Temperature, Pharma, Math, Function Generator,
Switch, PID, or Calculated Values*

* units of measure between the two input boards must be

similar

Source -99999 to For Linear Math Types. Gain multiplier for Calculation
99999.9 in Output = Gain * Input + Offset
Engineering Units
default = 1.000
Gain -99999 to
(Linear Only) 99999.9 in
Engineering Units
default = 0.000 For Linear Math Types. Offset for Calculation
Output = Gain * Input + Offset
Offset -99999 to
99999.9 in
(Linear Only) Engineering Units
default = 0.000
Filter Time 0 to 120 A software digital filter is provided for dampening the
default = 0.0 process noise and is applied before the limit functions.
The units are in time constant seconds.

86 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

6.12 Logic Configuration

Overview
The Logic group has four selections (Logic1, Logic 2, Logic 3, and Logic 4). Logic
selections have 2 input sources (A and B) and a selection for the Logic Type – “AND”,
OR”, or LATCH.
The sources can be any Digital Signal Source (Table 6-4).

Accessing Logic Menu

• Press Setup
to display the Main menu.
• Use the keys to select “Logic” then press Enter
to enter the sub-menu.
• Press to highlight the desired menu selection then press Enter
to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 87

Configuration

Table 6-11 Logic Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range Parameter Definition
selection of Setting
Logic 1 Type None (default) None
Logic 2
Logic 3 AND AND -Turns digital output ON when input IN A
Logic 4 Source and IN B Source are ON. Thus,
If all inputs are ON, then: OUT = ON.
If any input is OFF, then: OUT = OFF.
OR OR - Monitors Input A Source and Input B
Source to set state of digital output signal.
Note: User must set
to “OR” if only one If A = OFF and B = OFF, then OUT = OFF.
input source is being
used. If A = ON and/or B = ON, then: OUT = ON.

LATCH
LATCH – Sets and Resets Latch state of the
Output.
If A=ON, B=OFF The Output is Latched ON.
If A=OFF, B=ON, The Output is Latched OFF.
If A and B are ON the Output = ON
If A and B are OFF the Output = Latch State.
Power On considerations. The output state of the
latch is cleared on power on.
In A Source Any Digital Signal Input A logic source selections, and Input B logic
See Table 6-4 source selections
In B Source

Invert None (default) You can invert Input A or Input B or both. If the
IN A input is inverted, an input line that is ON is seen
IN B as OFF
In A and B
On Delay 0 to 120 seconds An on-delay time value up to 120 seconds is
default = 0.0 available to prevent momentary logic gate output
actions. Number of seconds the logic gate is true
before activating the Output.

88 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

6.13 Auxiliary Configuration

Overview
The Auxiliary group has four selections (Switch 1 and Switch 2) and (Func Gen 1 and
Func Gen 2).
Switch
Switch selections have 2 input sources (A and B). A switch block is used to select
between two analog signals. The switch block can be used for many monitor and control
strategies. A Digital Signal Source (Table 6-4) when active will select the B input source
of the switch as the output.
The Switch Input sources can be any Analog Signal Source (Table 6-3).
There are two switch blocks provided for general use.
Func Gen (Function Generator)
Function Generators are used for pre-control linearizing of inputs (such as during pH
titration).
Function Generator selections have 2 input sources (Input 1 PV and Input 2 PV).
It generates an output characteristic curve based on up to 11 configurable “Breakpoints”
for both Input (X) and Output (Y) values.
The figure below shows an example of using the Func Gen to characterize the PID
control loop output for control valve operation using 9 breakpoints.
Compensating for control valve characteristic

OUT9
100%

OUT8

OUT7
FGEN
OUTPUT
OUT6

OUT5

OUT4
OUT3

0% OUT2
OUT1
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8

PID OUTPUT
0% 100%

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 89

Configuration

Accessing Auxiliary Menu

• Press Setup
to display the Main menu.
• Use the keys to select “Auxiliary” then press Enter
to enter the sub-menu.
• Press to highlight the desired menu selection then press Enter
to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-12 Auxiliary Configuration
Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range of Setting Parameter Definition
selection
Switch 1 In A Source Any Analog Signal Analog Signal Source – Process signal
Switch 2 See Table 6-3 to be monitored by the Alarm. Any
In B Source
analog source such as PV, Temperature,
Pharma, Math, Function Generator,
Switch, PID, or Calculated Values*

* units of measure between the two input

boards must be similar

Select B Any Digital Signal Digital Signal Source when active will
See Table 6-4 select the B input source of the switch as
the output

Switch
InA
InB
Select B

If Select B is OFF then Switch Output = In A

If Select B is ON then Switch Output = In B

Func Gen 1 Source None Function Generator selections have 2

Func Gen 2 Input 1 PV input sources
Input 2 PV (Input 1 PV and Input 2 PV).
PID 1 Out
PID 2 Out

ATTENTION

The X (n) value must be < X(n+1) value. Thus, if fewer than 11 breakpoints are needed,
be sure to configure any unneeded breakpoints with the same X and Y values used for the
previous breakpoint.

90 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range of Setting Parameter Definition

selection
X1 –99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 1
Y1 –99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 1
X2 –99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 2
Y2 –99999 to 999999 Default= 10.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 2
X3 –99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 3
Y3 –99999 to 999999 Default= 20.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 3
X4 –99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 4
Y4 –99999 to 999999 Default= 30.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 4
X5 –99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 5
Y5 –99999 to 999999 Default= 40.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 5
X6 –99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 6
Y6 –99999 to 999999 Default= 50.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 6
X7 –99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 7
Y7 –99999 to 999999 Default= 60.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 7
X8 –99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 8
Y8 –99999 to 999999 Default= 70.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 8
X9 –99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 9
Y9 –99999 to 999999 Default= 80.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 9
X10 –99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 10
Y10 –99999 to 999999 Default= 90.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 10
X11 –99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 11
Y11 –99999 to 999999 Default= Y-value at Input Breakpoint 11
100.000

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 91

Configuration

6.14 PID Control Configuration

Overview
PID (Option) - Proportional (P), Integral (I) and Derivative (D), (3-mode) control action
based on the deviation or error signal created by the difference between the setpoint (SP)
and the Process variable analog input value (PV). PID Tuning parameters are available.
Automatic tuning with Fuzzy Logic Overshoot Suppression can be configured.
Other parameters listed in this group deal with how the analyzer will control the process
including: PV High and Low, Setpoint High and Low limits, the Control Algorithm and
Action, PID Tracking (TRV and TRC), Number of Tuning Parameter Sets and associated
parameters, Setpoint Rate, Power-up Recall, Output Limits, Failsafe Output Value,
Alarm setpoint type and value, and Alarm Hysteresis.
PID Tracking
PID tracking is a means to control a PID’s output without the PID loop winding up.
It is accomplished by the use of two inputs.
TRC (tracking control) – selects the tracking mode (See Table 6-13)
TRV (tracking value) – is the commanded output value in percentage
(PID Output = TRV Input when TRC = ON) (See Table 6-13)
When TRC is active, the front-panel display will indicate TRV for the PID loop.
Remote PID Tracking
Variables can be connected to TRC and TRV to allow remote control of the PID output.
TRC can be connected to a digital variable
TRV can be connected to an analog variable
PID Tracking versus Manual Mode
Tracking is not the same as manual mode.
• Tracking value cannot be adjusted from the front-panel. Manual output value can.
• Manual output cannot be adjusted remotely. Tracking value can.
• Manual has priority over tracking. If operating in the tracking mode, the output
can be adjusted from the front-panel by selecting manual and adjusting the output.
When manual is terminated, the active mode will be TRC and the output will go
to TRV.
Using Auto/Manual Switch
It may be desirable to use a discrete input to place a PID into manual momentarily to
freeze the output. With tracking, this can be done.
1. Connect the TRV to PID output
2. Connect the TRC to a discrete input
When the discrete input is active, the output is frozen – MANUAL select.
When the discrete input is inactive, the PID runs in the auto mode – AUTO select.

92 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

While TRV is active, the output can be adjusted using manual mode from the front-panel.
After manual mode is terminated, the output will remain at the level because the output is
tied to TRV.

ATTENTION
Upgrading software on the UDA2182 to a new version will remove PID control (on units where PID has
been ordered or been added in the Field).
Therefore, the following steps need to be followed in order to retrieve that option:
If PID was ordered when the unit was originally ordered:

• Retrieve your Unit ID by going to the MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu

• Call GTS (1-800-423-9883)

• Inform them that you are going to do a software upgrade and you need the Option ID for your unit
(this is why you need the Unit ID)

• Record Option ID for next step

• After upgrading software, go to MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu and enter the recorded
OPTION ID value.

• The PID will have to be reconfigured to settings prior to upgrade.

If PID was added after the unit was originally shipped:

• Before upgrading software, go to MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu and record the OPTION ID
value.
• After upgrading software, go to MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu and enter the recorded
OPTION ID value.
The PID will have to be reconfigured to settings prior to upgrade.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 93

Configuration

Accessing Control Menu

(See “Maintenance” Menu item (Section 6.18), “System” selection to Enable PID
Control)
• Press Setup
to display the Main menu.
• Use the keys to select “PID Control” then press Enter
to enter the sub-
menu.
PID Control 1 and 2 are divided into 3 sections:
PID(n) Config (Table 6-13),
PID(n)Tune (Table 6-14),
PID(n)Alarms (Table 6-15)
• Press to highlight the desired menu selection then press Enter
to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.

Table 6-13 PID Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition
selection Range of Setting

PID 1 Config PV Source None Process Variable Source

PID 2 Config Input 1 PV (default)
Input 2 PV

PV High -99999 to 99999 Input Range of the PV - High Range Value

default = High These values are in units of that Input PV, such
Range of PV Input as 0-14pH.
PV Low -99999 to 99999 Input Range of the PV - Low Range Value
default = Low These values are in units of that Input PV, such as
Range of PV Input 0-14pH.

SP High Limit -99999 to 99999 Setpoint High Limit Value - prevents the
default = High setpoint from going above the value set here.
Range of PV Input
SP Low Limit -99999 to 99999 Setpoint Low Limit Value - prevents the
default = Low setpoint from going below the value set here.
Range of PV Input
Output High Limit -99999 to 99999 Output High Limit Value - is the highest value
default = 100.00 of output beyond which you do not want the
automatic output to exceed.
Output Low Limit -99999 to 99999 Output Low Limit Value - is the lowest value of
default = 0.00 output beyond which you do not want the
automatic output to go below.

94 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition

selection Range of Setting
Control Alg PIDA (default) PID A - is normally used for 3-mode control.
PIDB The output can be adjusted somewhere
Duplex A between 100 % and 0 %. It applies all three
Duplex B control actions -Proportional (P), Integral (I),
and Derivative (D) - to the error signal.
Note: PID B - Unlike the PID-A equation, the
In PID A, a step analyzer gives only an integral response to a
change in setpoint setpoint change, with no effect on the output
will result in a step due to the Gain or Rate action, and gives full
change in output. response to PV changes.
In PID B, step DUPA - like PID A but provides an automatic
changes in setpoint method to switch tuning constant sets.
will not bump the
output; the output DUPB - like PID B but provides an automatic
will slew smoothly method to switch tuning constant sets.
to the new value.
Note: For Duplex A and Duplex B if the output
is greater than 50%, then tuning set 1 is used.
If the output is less than 50%, then tuning set 2
is used.
Control Action Direct DIRECT - PID action causes output to
Reverse (default) increase as process variable increases.
REVERSE - PID action causes output to
decrease as process variable increases.
Power Mode Manual(default) Mode permitted at power up.
Last
Power Out Failsafe (default) Output at Power up
Last
FAILSAFE - Failsafe output value.
LAST - Same as at power down.
Failsafe Out -5.00 to 105.00% Failsafe Output Value – The Output value to
default = 0.00 which the analyzer will go if there is a power
down or Failsafe condition (Input Faults).
Manual Select Any Digital Signal Selects Manual Output
See Table 6-4

SP Power On Setpoint at Power up

Last LAST - Same as at power down.
Local SP(default) Local SP – Local Setpoint value.
RSP Source Any Analog Signal Selects the analog signal that will be used as
See Table 6-3 the remote setpoint. The remote setpoint
should be supplied in PV engineering units.
Ratio 1.0 (Default) Ratio that is applied to the Remote Setpoint.
-20 to 20

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 95

Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition

selection Range of Setting
Bias 0.0 Default Bias that is applied to the Remote Setpoint.
-9999 to 99999
RSP Select Monitor (1 – 4) When this input is ON, the Remote Setpoint is
Logic (1 – 4) used. If set to None, the operator can select
Digital In (1 – 2) the remote setpoint from the PID operator
display.
FF Source Any Analog Signal Feed Forward value that is applied to the
See Table 6-3 output. A change in the feed forward signal
input will result in a proportional change in the
output per the feed forward gain parameter.
FF Gain 1.000 (default) Feed Forward Gain used to calculate the
0.1 to 1000.0 change in the PID output based upon a change
of the feed forward input signal.
TRC Select Any Digital Signal TRC (tracking control) – selects the tracking
See Table 6-4 mode
TRV Select Any Analog Signal
TRV (tracking value) – is the commanded
See Table 6-3
output value in percentage
(PID Output = TRV Input when TRC = ON)
When TRC is active, the front-panel display will
indicate TRC for the PID loop.
Variables can be connected to TRC and TRV
to allow remote control of the PID output.
TRC can be connected to a digital variable
TRV can be connected to an analog variable
Manual Permit Enable (default) Allows the operator to select Manual Operation
Disable of the PID loop from the PID Operator Display
Auto Permit Enable (default) Allows the operator to select Auto Operation of
Disable the PID loop from the PID Operator Display
LSP Permit Enable (default) Allows the operator to select the Local Setpoint
Disable from the PID Operator Display
RSP Permit Enable (default) Allows the operator to select the Remote
Disable Setpoint from the PID Operator Display

96 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Table 6-14 PID Tuning

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition
selection Range of Setting

PID 1 Tune Accutune Enable When enabled, the analyzer will start
PID 2 Tune Disable (default) controlling to the setpoint while it identifies the
process and adjusts the Gain or Proportional
Band (P), Rate (I), and Reset Time (D) tuning
constants in response to setpoint changes
and/or Process Variable disturbances.
Fuzzy Logic Enable Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression minimizes
Disable (default) overshoot after a setpoint change or a process
disturbance.
The fuzzy logic observes the speed and
direction of the PV signal as it approaches the
setpoint and temporarily modifies the internal
control response action as necessary to avoid
an overshoot.
There is no change to the PID algorithm, and
the fuzzy logic does not alter the PID tuning
parameters.
This feature can be independently Enabled or
Disabled as required by the application to work
with Accutune.
Use Prop Band Enable When enabled, Proportional band is used
Disable (default) instead of Gain (default).
See “Gain or Prop Band”.
Use RPM Enable When enabled, Repeat per minute is used
Disable (default) instead of Minutes per Repeat (default).
See “Reset”.
Gain or Prop Band Gain – 0.1% to Gain (default) – is the ratio of output change
1000.0% (%) over the measured variable change (%)
that caused it.
PB – 0.1 to
1000.0% 100 %
G=
default = 1.000 PB %

where Prop Band is the proportional Band (in

%of Input Range)
Proportional Band (Prop Band) - is the
percentage of the range of the measured
variable for which a proportional controller will
produce a 100 % change in its output.
Rate -0.035 to 10.000 RATE action, in minutes affects the control
output whenever the deviation is changing; and
default = 0.000
affects it more when the deviation is changing
faster. The amount of corrective action
depends on the value of Gain.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 97

Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition

selection Range of Setting
Reset -0.02 to 50 RESET (Integral Time) - adjusts the control
output according to both the size of the
default = 1.000
deviation (SP-PV) and the time it lasts. The
amount of corrective action depends on the
value of Gain.
The reset adjustment is measured as how
many times proportional action is repeated per
minute (Repeats/minute) or how many minutes
before one repeat of the proportional action
occurs (Minutes/repeat – default).
Tune Set 2 None (default) Digital Source for selection of Tuning set 2.
Monitor 1
Monitor 2 When active, this input will override the current
Monitor 3 tuning set selection and force the PID to use
Monitor 4 tuning set 2. This applies for non-duplex type
Logic 1 control.
Logic 2
Note: For duplex control types, the tune set is
Logic 3
automatically select by the output zone (Tune
Logic 4
2 selected for Output < 50).
Digital In 1
Digital In 2
Gain or Prop Band 2 0.1 to 1000.0 Gain or Prop Band2 for Tuning Set 2. Same as
default = 1.000 Gain or Prop Band.
Rate 2 -0.035 to 10.000 Rate 2 for Tuning Set 2. Same as Rate.
default = 0.000
Reset 2 -0.02 to 50 Reset 2 for Tuning Set 2 Same as Reset.
default = 1.000

Table 6-15 PID Alarms

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition
selection Range of Setting

PID 1 Alarms Alm 1 SP1 Type No Alarm (default) Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Type
PID 2 Alarms PV High High PV Alarm: PV > Alm SP
PV Low Low PV Alarm: PV < Arm SP
Dev High High Deviation Alarm: |PV – SP| > Alm SP
Dev Low Low Deviation Alarm: |PV – SP| < Alm SP
SP High High Setpoint Alarm: SP > Alm SP
SP Low Low Setpoint Alarm: SP < Alm SP
Output High High Output Alarm: Out > Alm SP
Output Low Low Output Alarm: Out < Alm SP
Alm 1 SP1 Value -99999 to 99999 Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Value
default = 0.000

98 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Parameter Definition

selection Range of Setting
Alm 1 SP2 Type Same as Alarm 1 Same as Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Type
Setpoint 1
No Alarm (default)
Alm 1 SP2 Value -99999 to 99999 Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 Value
default = 0.000
Alm 2 SP1 Type Same as Alarm 1 Same as Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Type
Setpoint 1
No Alarm (default)
Alm 2 SP1 Value -99999 to 99999 Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 Value
default = 0.000
Alm 2 SP2 Type Same as Alarm 1 Same as Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Type
Setpoint 1
No Alarm (default)
Alm 2 SP2 Value -99999 to 99999 Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 Value
default = 0.000
Alm Hysteresis 0 to 100% Alarm Hysteresis – an adjustable overlap of
default = 0.00 the ON/OFF states of each alarm.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 99

Configuration

6.15 Auto Cycling Configuration

6.15.1 Overview
Auto cycling provides automated timing, control and functionality for the cleaning and
calibration of input probes. Each input PV has a dedicated auto cycle function block.
The input board type and in the case of pH, the PV type, determines the level of auto
cycling capability, as indicated below:
Input Board Type Auto Cycle Operation
Preamp pH Rinse, Auto Buffer Cal 1 (zero offset), Auto Buffer Cal 2 (slope)
pH/ORP, PV Type not Rinse, Auto Buffer Cal 1, Auto Buffer Cal 2
ORP

pH/ORP, PV type is ORP Rinse Only

Conductivity Rinse Only
DO ppm Rinse, Auto Air Cal

DO ppb Rinse, Auto Air Cal

Auto cycling is supported with setup menus, status displays and operational displays
(Section 5.7) as well as event (Section 5.11) and calibration history logging (Section 11).
6.15.2 Accessing Auto Cycle Menu
• Press Setup
to display the Main menu.
• Use the keys to select “Auto Cycling” then press Enter
to enter the sub-
menu:
Auto Cycle 1 or Auto Cycle 2
• Press to highlight the desired menu selection then press Enter
to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.

100 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

6.15.3 Auto Cycling Configuration

Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration
Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range Parameter Definition and Restrictions
selection of Setting

Auto Cycle 1 Auto Cycling Disable (default) Allows auto cycling to be selected. This
Auto Cycle 2 Enable should be enabled after configuration is
complete.
Hold Active Enable (default) When enabled, the output(s) sourced by input
Disable n for Auto Clean n is in hold during auto
cycling.
Probe Transit Disable (default) When enabled, allows probe extract and
Enable probe insert sequence steps to occur and
automated probe extract and insert
parameters are made available.
Cycle Start Source None or Any Digital Starts Auto Cycle on specific Digital Signal
Signal selected changing from 0 to 1.
See Table 6-4

Extract Wait Src None or Any Digital Allows selection of a specific Digital Signal
(Probe Transit = Signal that causes a delay in the probe extraction
Enabled) See Table 6-4 sequence. While the selected digital input is
active the probe extraction will not end unless
a timeout occurs as determined by the
duration configured in Probe Transit Mins. If
a source is configured, the timeout results in
an Auto Cycle Fail. If a digital signal is not
available, the source may be left at “None”
and the extract step will occur for the duration
of Probe Transit Mins.
Insert Wait Src None or Any Digital Allows selection of a specific Digital Signal
(Probe Transit = Signal that causes a delay in the probe insertion
Enabled) See Table 6-4 sequence. While the selective digital input is
active the probe insertion will not end unless a
timeout occurs as determined by the duration
configured in Probe Transit Mins. If a source
is configured, the timeout results in an Auto
Cycle Fail. If a digital signal is not available,
the source may be left at “None” and the
extract step will occur for the duration of
Probe Transit Mins.
Cycle Interval Off(default) Frequency of Auto Cycle occurrence
Monthly
Weekly
Daily
Custom
Start Time Disable (default) Set specific time for Auto-Cycle to start.
Enable
(Custom)

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 101

Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range Parameter Definition and Restrictions

selection of Setting
Start Day 1 to 28 (default = 1) Cycle Interval is Monthly
(Dependent Sunday – Saturday Cycle Interval is Weekly
parameters) (default = Sunday)
1 to 31 (default = 1) Cycle Interval is Custom, Start Time enabled
Start Hour 0 to 23 Cycle Interval is Monthly, Weekly, Daily
(default = 12)
(Dependent
parameters)
Start Mins 0 to 59 (default = 0) Cycle Interval is Monthly, Weekly or Daily
Cycle Interval is Custom, Start Time enabled
(Dependent
parameters)
Period Days 0 to 100(default = The period day parameter allows the selection
0) of how often the Auto cycle will occur.
(Custom) For Example: 20 means that the Auto Cycle
will occur every 20 days.
Period Hours 0 to 23 (default = 1) For Example: 4 means that the Auto-cycle will
occur every 4 hours when the days and
(custom) minutes are set to 0.
Period Mins 0 to 59 (default = 0) For Example: 30 means that the Auto-cycle
will occur every 30 minutes when the days
and hours are set to 0.
Rinse Cycle Cnt 0 to 100(default = Allows selection for frequency of rinse occurrence.
1)
Cal Cycle Cnt 0 to 100(default = Allows selection for frequency of calibration
1) occurrence. For Example: 1 indicates that a
(PV is DO) calibration will occur every cycle while a 10
indicates that a calibration will occur every 10th
cycle.

Cal 1 Cycle Cnt 0 to 100(default = Allows selection for frequency of calibration

1) occurrences.
(PV is pH)
Cal 2 Cycle Cnt 0 to 100(default = Allows selection for frequency of calibration
1) occurrences.
(PV is pH)
Max Transit Mins 0 to 30.00 Maximum Probe Transit time in minutes.
(default = 0.50)
(Probe Transit =
Enabled)

Rinse Mins 0 to 30.00 Duration of Rinse sequence in minutes

(default = 0.50)
Max Cal Mins 0 to 30.00 Maximum calibration time in minutes. Enough time
(default = 0.50) should be entered to allow process stabilization
(PV pH, DO) and a 20 second measurement time.

102 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range Parameter Definition and Restrictions

selection of Setting
Resume Dly Mins 0 to 30.00 Process resume delay in minutes.
(default = 0.50)

6.15.4 pH Auto Cycling Configuration Example

The example in Table 6-17 configures the UDA to perform a rinse function once per day,
at 8:00 AM, and once per week perform a 1 point Standardization, using 7 buffer. Then
once every 4 weeks, perform a complete 2 point Standardize & Slope, using 7 buffer and
4 buffer. Also assume that the sensor is retracted from the sample line during the rinse
and cal (not required).
Table 6-17 Example Auto Cycling Configuration for pH
Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range Parameter Definition and Restrictions
selection of Setting

Auto Cycle 1 Auto Cycling Enable Allows auto cycling to be selected. This
Auto Cycle 2 should be enabled after configuration is
complete.
Hold Active Enable When enabled, the output(s) sourced by input
n for Auto Clean n is in hold during auto
cycling.
Probe Transit Enable When enabled, allows probe extract and
probe insert sequence steps to occur and
automated probe extract and insert
parameters are made available.
Cycle Start Source None

Extract Wait Src Digital Signal 1 This is the end of travel “out” switch on the
See Table 6-4 extraction device
Insert Wait Src Digital Signal 2 This is the end of travel “in” switch on the
See Table 6-4 extraction device
Cycle Interval Daily Frequency of Auto Cycle to occur daily

Start Hour 8 Cycle to start at 8:00 AM

Start Mins 0
Rinse Cycle Cnt 1 Rinse to occur every cycle.

Cal 1 Cycle Cnt 7 Standardize occurs once every 7 cycles, or once

per week.

Cal 2 Cycle Cnt 28 Slope Cal occurs once per 28 days, or every 4
weeks

Max Transit Mins 0.5 If extraction takes longer than 30 seconds, then get
a “AUTOCYCLE FAIL ALARM”
(Probe Transit =
Enabled)

Rinse Mins 2 Each rinse duration is 2 minutes

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 103

Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range Parameter Definition and Restrictions

selection of Setting
Max Cal Mins 2 If the reading is unstable after 2 minutes then get a
“AUTOCYCLE FAIL ALARM”.

Resume Dly Mins 5 Wait 5 minutes after cycle completes and sensor is
reinserted before removing HOLD and returning to
On-Line mode.

104 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

6.16 Variables Configuration

Overview
The Variables menu allows you to configure the values that variables are set to when the UDA is
first powered on.
This group has two selections:
Analog
This selection lets you configure the initial values of the Analog Variables.
Digital
This selection lets you configure the initial values of the Digital Variables.

Accessing Variables Menu

• Press Setup
to display the Main menu.
• Use the keys to select “Variables” then press Enter
to enter the sub-menu.
• Press to highlight the desired menu selection then press Enter
to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-18 Variables Configuration
Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range Parameter Definition
selection of Setting
Analog Anlg Var 1 Init -99999.99 to Initial Values of the Analog Variable applied at
99999.99 power on.
Anlg Var 2 Init
Anlg Var 3 Init
Anlg Var 4 Init
Digital Dgtl Var 1 Init Off Initial Values of the Digital Variable applied at
power on.
Dgtl Var 2 Init ON
Dgtl Var 3 Init
Dgtl Var 4 Init

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 105

Configuration

6.17 Communication Configuration

Overview
The communication menu allows you to configure the Communications Card. There are four
selections:
IR Front Panel – configure the IR Front Panel interface
Modbus – configure the byte order
RS485 – configure the RS485 interface of the Communications Card.
Ethernet – configure the Ethernet interface of the Communication card.

Accessing Communication Menu

• Press Setup
to display the Main menu.
• Use the keys to select “Communication” then press Enter
to enter the sub-
menu.
• Press to highlight the desired menu selection then press Enter
to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-19 Communication Configuration
Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range Parameter Definition
selection of Setting
IR Front Port Reset Off (default) When enabled, Port Reset initializes the IR
Panel Enable Interface.
Mode Enable(default) Enable - allows IR to work anytime. No IR
Setup address required and on any front-panel screen.
Address Setup – IR only works when the front-panel is in
Disable a setup screen. This will allow the IR interface
to be password protected if a password is
configured. No IR address required.
Address -- The UDA’s IR address must be used
to communicate to the UDA.
Disable – The UDA will not respond to any
request on the IR interface.
Modbus Word Swap Yes (default) Word Swap lets you set the word order for
No Modbus communications.
YES – sets the order to “Big Endian” format
NO – sets the order to “Little Endian” format
RS485 Port Reset Off (default) Enable selection resets the Communication card.
Enable It should be enabled when the Address or Baud
Rate or both are changed.

106 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range Parameter Definition

selection of Setting
Address 0 to 999 (default = 0) Modbus RTU Slave ID – 0 is offline
Baud Rate 2400 (default) Modbus RTU Baud Rate
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
Ethernet Port Reset Off (default) Enable selection resets the Communication card.
Enable It should be enabled when configurations for
Ethernet are modified.
DHCP No (default) When YES, Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Yes server automatically assigns a dynamic IP
address to UDA.
The set dynamic IP can be seen from “Comm
Status” display.
IpAddr Octet 1 0 to 255 These parameters are visible only when DHCP
IpAddr Octet 2 option is NO.
IpAddr Octet 3
IpAddr Octet 4 Allows you to assign Static IP address to the
UDA.
SbntMsk Octet 1 0 to 255 These parameters are visible only when DHCP
SbntMsk Octet 2 option is NO.
SbntMsk Octet 3
SbntMsk Octet 4 Allows you to assign Subnet Mask as per the
local network settings

Dflt Gtwy Octet 1 0 to 255 These parameters are visible only when DHCP
Dflt Gtwy Octet 2 option is NO.
Dflt Gtwy Octet 3
Dflt Gtwy Octet 4 Allows you to assign the Default Gateway as per
the local network settings
DNS Srvr Octet 1 0 to 255 These parameters are visible only when DHCP
DNS Srvr Octet 2 option is NO.
DNS Srvr Octet 3
DNS Srvr Octet 4 Allows you to assign the DNS server IP address
as per the local network settings

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 107

Configuration

6.18 Maintenance Configuration

Accessing Maintenance Menu
• Press Setup
to display the Main menu.
• Use the keys to select “Maintenance” then press Enter
to enter the sub-
menu.
• Press to highlight the desired menu selection then press Enter
to display the
group of parameters.
• Press to highlight the parameter selection, then press Enter
to allow changes.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-20 Maintenance Configuration
Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range of Parameter Definition
selection Setting

System SW Version* Software version Read Only

number
*See note at end of table
Language Language Set EE Multi-language prompts guide the operator step-
by-step through the configuration process
English (default) assuring quick and accurate entry of all
Italiano configurable parameters.
Deutsch Select from: English, French, German, Spanish
Francais and Italian (Language Set EE).
Espanõl
Language Set RT English, Russian and Turkish (Language Set RT)

English (default)
Pусский
Türkçe
Language Set PC English, Polish and Czech (Language Set PC)

English (default)
Polski
Česká
Read Only - EE Read only language set of the software
Language Set RT EE - English, French, German, Spanish and Italian
RT - English, Russian and Turkish
PC PC - English, Polish and Czech

Mains Freq 60 Hz (default) This function determines the frequency of AC line

50 Hz noise suppression for the input ADC circuitry.

108 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range of Parameter Definition

selection Setting
Password 0000 (default) to 9999 Setup configuration, calibration and maintenance
functions can be password-protected. The
AAAA to ZZZZ password can be any number between 1 and
9999 or letters. (When the password is zero, the
operator will not be prompted to enter a
password.)
Follow the “ General Rules for Editing” to change
the digits.
Unit ID Unit Identification Read Only
Option ID* Option ID Number = 0 if PID is not available
= ID Number if PID available
*See note at end of table
PID Control* 1 Loop Enables the PID Control configuration
2 Loops (default) Parameters
*See note at end of table
Unit Reset No (default) Unit Reset initializes all calibration and
Yes configuration data to factory default values, with
the exception of the Factory Temperature
Calibration correction values

Inputs Input 1 Type Read Only pH/ORP - pH or Oxidation Reduction Potential

Input 2 Type pH Preamp – pH with preamplifier
Conductivity (Dual if both inputs same)
DO ppm - Dissolved Oxygen
DO ppb - Dissolved Oxygen

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 109

Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range of Parameter Definition

selection Setting
Cond Units NIST (default) The NIST system of conductivity measurement
Type uses units of centimeters, and in the UDA are
specifically µS/cm and mS/cm for conductivity
and KΩ-m for resistivity.
ISO The ISO system of conductivity measurement
uses units of meters, and in the UDA are
specifically μS/m, mS/m and S/m for conductivity
and KΩ-m for resistivity.
The conductivity “Units Type” selected here
affects the “PV Type” selections available under
“Setup/Inputs/pH Preamp n. Selection of units
type will scale all live conductivity and Resistivity
readings on monitor and input calibration screens
according to the factors listed:
NIST ISO ISO/NIST factor
μS/cm μS/m 0.01

μS/cm mS/m 10
mS/cm S/m 10
MΩ-cm KΩ-m 0.1

Cond Wire AWG (default) “Wire Size Units” allows selection of either AWG
Size Sq mm or Square millimeters (Sqmm). When changing
units, the wire size parameter value is not
converted. A pop-up message warns you of this.
Cond Wire Len Feet (default) “Wire Length Units” allows selection of either
Meters meters or feet for the Wire Length parameter in
the Inputs group. When changing units, the wire
length parameter value is not converted. A pop-
up message warns you of this. If the value is no
longer within range, it will change to closest
range limit.
Cation Calc None None

pH NH3 Ammonia pH – Specific conductivity

temperature compensation assumes Ammonia
NH3 is the base reagent
pH Amines Amine pH – Specific conductivity temperature
compensation assuming a generic amine base.
ppbCO2 CO2 determination by degassed conductivity.

110 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Sub-menu Parameter Selection or Range of Parameter Definition

selection Setting
Temp Units ºF “Temperature Units” allows selection of either
degrees C or degrees F for the display of
º C (default) measured temperature on monitor,
pharmacopoeia, control and input calibration
screens and for the entry of manual temperature
input values in Setup/Inputs. When changing the
temperature units, the manual temperature input
value is not converted. A pop-up message warns
you of this. If the value is no longer within range,
it will change to the closest range limit.

Display Header 1 Label (default) Determines the time and date displayed within
2 Labels the Monitor Display header.
Label/Time
Date/Time
Label Alphanumeric text Header Format is 1 Label
(max 16 characters)
default: “Honeywell
UDA”
Label Alphanumeric text Header Format is Label/Time
(max 10 characters)
default: “Honeywell”
Label 1 Alphanumeric text Header Format is Label 1 / Label 2
(max 10 characters)
default: “Honeywell”
Label 2 Alphanumeric text Header Format is Label 1 / Label 2
(max 10 characters)
default: “UDA2182”
Clr Evt Hist No (default) Clear Event History – Yes, clears the Event
Yes History Screen (see Section 5.11)
Clr Cal Hist No (default) Clear Cal History – Yes, clears the Calibration
Yes History Screen (see Section 11)

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 111

Configuration

Tag Names Select Tag and Press “Enter”. Follow the “General Rules for Editing” to edit the character
string.
Input 1 0 to 16 Characters The real-time displays of process values show
Input 2 the instrument’s tag name (or other configurable
PID Loop 1 fixed sixteen-character string) at the top of the
PID Loop 2 screen.
Auto Cycle 1
Auto Cycle 2
Pharma 1
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4

Clock Date Format YYYY/MM/DD The parameters Date Format and Time Format
(default) determine how time and date are displayed in
MM/DD/YYYY both the Monitor Display header and the Event
DD/MM/YYYY History.
Time Format 24 Hour (default)
12 Hour
Year 2005-2037

Month 1 to 12

Day 1 – 28, 29, 30 or 31

(default: 1)
(determined by year
& month)
Hour 0 – 23 (24 Hour
format)
1 – 12 (12 Hour
format)
AM/PM AM (default)
PM
Time Format is 12
Hour
Minutes 0 – 59
Tests Display Test Off (default) Display Test action occurs when the “Enter” key
Enable is pressed to accept the selection.
Keypad Test Off (default) When the keyboard test is enabled, the Status
Enable Message area displays the name of the key
currently pressed.
Note: The keypad test will exit three seconds
after no key is pressed.

112 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Configuration

Output Level 1 Off (default) Output action occurs when the “Enter” key is
Output Level 2 0% pressed to accept selection.
Output Level 3 25%
50% Actual output current is consistent with selected
75% current range of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA.
100%
Low Limit
High Limit
Relay 1 State Off (default) Relay state action occurs when the “Enter” key is
Relay 2 State Energized pressed to accept selection.
Relay 3 State De-energized
Relay 4 State

*ATTENTION
Upgrading software on the UDA2182 to a new version will remove PID control (on units where PID has
been ordered or been added in the Field).
Therefore, the following steps need to be followed in order to retrieve that option:
If PID was ordered when the unit was originally ordered:

• Retrieve your Unit ID by going to the MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu

• Call GTS (1-800-423-9883)

• Inform them that you are going to do a software upgrade and you need the Option ID for your unit
(this is why you need the Unit ID)

• Record Option ID for next step

• After upgrading software, go to MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu and enter the recorded
OPTION ID value.

• The PID will have to be reconfigured to settings prior to upgrade.

If PID was added after the unit was originally shipped:
• Before upgrading software, go to MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu and record the OPTION ID
value.
• After upgrading software, go to MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu and enter the recorded
OPTION ID value.
• The PID will have to be reconfigured to settings prior to upgrade.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 113

Inputs and Outputs Wiring

7 Inputs and Outputs Wiring

7.1 Overview
Introduction
This section contains instructions for wiring the inputs and outputs of the Analyzer.

What’s in this section?

The topics in this section are listed below.

Topic See Page

7.1 Overview 114

7.2 General Wiring Practices 115
7.3 Inputs and Outputs 117
7.4 Direct pH/ORP Input Wiring Diagrams 120
7.5 pH Input from External Preamplifier/Cap Adapter Wiring Diagrams 126
7.6 Conductivity 130
7.7 Dissolved Oxygen 131
7.8 Communications Card 133
7.9 Outputs 134
7.10 Option Card 135

114 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Inputs and Outputs Wiring

7.2 General Wiring Practices

WARNING
Qualified personnel should perform wiring only.

Safety precaution
WARNING
A disconnect switch must be installed to break all current
carrying conductors. Turn off power before working on
conductors. Failure to observe this precaution may result in
serious personal injury.

WARNING
An external disconnect switch is required for any hazardous
voltage connections to the relay outputs.

CAUTION
To avoid damage to the case when connecting to a rigid metallic conduit system, the
conduit hub must be connected to the conduit before the hub is connected to the
enclosure

Avoid damage to components

ATTENTION
This equipment contains devices that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). As
solid-state technology advances and as solid-state devices get smaller and smaller, they
become more and more sensitive to ESD. The damage incurred may not cause the device to
fail completely, but may cause early failure. Therefore, it is imperative that assemblies
containing static sensitive devices be carried in conductive plastic bags. When adjusting or
performing any work on such assemblies, grounded workstations and wrist straps must be
used. If soldering irons are used, they must also be grounded.

A grounded workstation is any conductive or metallic surface connected to an earth ground,

such as a water pipe, with a 1/2 to 1 megohm resistor in series with the ground connection. The
purpose of the resistor is to current limit an electrostatic discharge and to prevent any shock
hazard to the operator. The steps indicated above must be followed to prevent damage and/or
degradation, which may be induced by ESD, to static sensitive devices.

Immunity compliance

In applications where either the power, input or output wiring are subject to
electromagnetic disturbances, shielding techniques will be required. Grounded metal
conduit with conductive conduit fittings is recommended.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 115

Inputs and Outputs Wiring

Conform to code
Instrument wiring should conform to regulations of the National Electrical Code.

Recommended maximum wire size

Table 7-1 Recommended Maximum Wire Size
Gage Number mm2 Description
14 2.081 power, relays, and PE
(protective earth)
18 0.823 inputs
18 0.823 isolated outputs

Shielded wiring for locations with interference

In applications where plastic conduit or open wire trays are used, shielded milticonductor
22 gage (0.326 mm2) or heavier signal input wiring is required.

Avoiding interference
Instrument wiring is considered Level 1, per section 6.3 of IEEE STD. 518 for plant
facilities layout and instrumentation application. Level 1 wiring must not be run close to
higher level signals such as power lines or drive signals for phase fired SCR systems, etc.
Unprotected input wiring in high electrical noise environments is subject to
electromagnetic, electrostatic, and radio frequency interference pickup of sufficient
magnitude to overload input filters. The best instrument performance is obtained by
keeping the interfering signals out of the instruments altogether by using proper wiring
practices.

References
Refer to the following when wiring the unit.
• IEEE STD. 518, Guide for the Installation of Electrical Equipment to Minimize
Electrical Noise Inputs from External Sources.
• Appropriate wiring diagram supplied with electrode mounting or preamplifier
module.

116 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Inputs and Outputs Wiring

7.3 Inputs and Outputs

Introduction
The analyzer can accept single or dual inputs from Honeywell Direct pH, pH Input from
External Preamplifier, ORP, Contacting Conductivity and Dissolved Oxygen sensors.
Two analog outputs standard
One additional output optional
Two electromechanical relays standard
Two additional relays optional
Two Digital Inputs
Wiring these inputs and outputs is described here.

Accessing the terminals

The wiring is easily accessible through the front and the boards can be pulled out to
facilitate the wiring of sensor input.
Open the case.
*ATTENTION
The display cable can become loose from the connector on the display board. Follow these
instructions for re-inserting the cable into the connector:
Open connector by carefully lifting connector as shown:

Once the cable has been inserted carefully close the connector.

Loosen the four captive screws on the front of the bezel.

Grasp the bezel on the right side. Lift the bezel gently and swing the bezel open to the
left.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 117

Inputs and Outputs Wiring

Wiring terminals and board location

Communications Board Location Option Board Location

Input 1 Board Location

with pH, ORP or
pH Preamp
Power Supply/
Input Board* and Terminals
Analog Output/
Relay Output
Board Location * Boards can be in either location

Input 2 Board Location

with Conductivity or
L1
L2
Dissolved Oxygen
N Input Board* and Terminals

Board Retainer
Power Supply Terminals

Ground Screws
Ground Stud Wiring Access Ports (5)

Inside case with door open

Figure 7-1 Wiring Terminals and board Location

Procedure
WARNING
While the unit is powered, a potentially lethal shock hazard
exists inside the case. Do not open the case while the unit is
powered.

118 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Inputs and Outputs Wiring

Table 7-2 Procedure for installing Input and Output wiring

Step Action
1 Go to Configuration setup to view the displays showing analog input, relay, and analog
output use. Note the assignments shown. You must wire the unit to match these
assignments in order for the analyzer to work as expected (See Section 6).

ATTENTION
Turn off the power to the analyzer.
More than one switch may be required to remove power.
2 With power off, open the case:
• Loosen the four captive screws on the front of the bezel.
• Grasp the bezel on the right side. Lift the bezel gently and swing the bezel open to the left.
3 Refer to Figure 7-1 for the location of the terminal board retainer. Loosen the screws that
hold the retainer and slide the retainer left until the retainer tabs disengage from the terminal
boards.
4 Insert a screwdriver into the tab in the terminal board to be wired and pull out gently. Slide
the board half way out. There is a notch in the terminal board into which you can slide the
retainer tabs and hold the boards in place while wiring.
5 Connect the inputs from the electrode or cells to the terminals in accordance with the
configuration setup assignments. Refer to the wiring diagram provided with the electrode or
cell, and to Figure 7-2 through Figure 7-20
6 Analog outputs (In addition to the standard outputs, one more is available as an option). See
Option Board Wiring - Figure 7-20). Connect the outputs from the Analyzer terminals in
accordance with the configuration setup assignments. Refer to the wiring diagrams provided
with the field devices receiving the signals, and to Figure 7-2 through Figure 7-20.
7 If the relay outputs are to be used, leave the unit open and powered down. The relays can
be used for Time Proportioning Output, Pulse Frequency Output, and Digital Output control
as well as alarm annunciation. (In addition to the standard relays, two more are available as
an option. See Option Board Wiring - Figure 7-20). Connect the outputs from the Analyzer
terminals in accordance with the configuration setup assignments. Refer to the wiring
diagrams provided with the external device and to Figure 7-2 through Figure 7-20.
These relays can be programmed to de-energize or energize on alarm. Use the
Maintenance configuration setup to specify relay state. (NOTE 1)

CAUTION: Alarm circuits are not internally fused in the analyzer. Provision for fuses in
external circuits is recommended.
8 Slide the retainer to the left then slide the terminal board back into place. Slide retainer to
engage the tabs and tighten the screws.
9 Close the Bezel and secure four captive screws to a torque value of .20Nm (1.5 Lb-in).
Power up the unit.
Do not apply power until the bezel is closed.
Note 1: If set to de-energize on alarm, this means that when an alarm occurs (or the discrete control point
becomes active), the relay coil will be de-energized. The NC contacts will then be closed and the NO
contacts will be open. Conversely, during normal non-alarm operation (or when the control point is not
active) the NC contacts will be open, and the NO contacts will be closed. If de-energize on alarm is selected,
a power loss will force all relays to the same position as an alarm condition.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 119

Inputs and Outputs Wiring

7.4 Direct pH/ORP Input Wiring Diagrams

Durafet III
Cable shield (yellow) Wire Signal
to chassis ground screw Color Name
Green 15 RKO res- (Low)
Green with Black stripe 14 RKO res- (High)
Blue 13 Drain
Orange 12 Source
Red 11 Substrate
Black 10 Reference
9

White with Black stripe 7 Counter

RTH 3rd Wire
Remove pre-wired
Orange with Black stripe 6
jumper at
Red with Black stripe 5 RTH Low
terminals 5 & 6
White 4 RTH High
Black with White stripe 3 EEGND
Blue with Black stripe 2 EEDATA
1

Figure 7-2 Terminal Designations for Durafet III Electrode

120 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Inputs and Outputs Wiring

Durafet II

Cable shield (yellow) Wire Signal

to chassis ground screw Color Name
Green 15 RKO res- (Low)
Green with Black stripe 14 RKO res- (High)
Blue 13 Drain
Orange 12 Source
Red 11 Substrate
Black 10 Reference
9

White with Black stripe 7 Counter

Orange with Black stripe 6 RTH 3rd Wire Remove pre-wired
jumper at
White 5 RTH Low
terminals 5 & 6
Red with Black stripe 4 RTH High
3

Figure 7-3 Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 121

Inputs and Outputs Wiring

Glass Meredian II

Wire Signal
Color Name
15

14

13

12

11

Orange 10 Reference
White with Black stripe 9 Guard
Clear (center conductor of coax) 8 Glass (or ORP)
7

Jumper 6

White 5 RTH Low

White 4 RTH High
3

Some cables have connectors on the leads.

Cut off the connectors, skin and tin the leads
and then wire to the screw terminals on the boards

Figure 7-4 Terminal Designations for Meredian II Electrode

Wire Signal
Color Name
15

14

13

12

11

Orange 10 Reference
Black pigtail of Coax 9 Guard
Center conductor of Coax 8 Glass (or ORP)
7

Jumper 6

Green 5 RTH Low

Red 4 RTH High
3

2
Cable shield (Violet)
to chassis ground screw 1

Some cables have connectors on the leads.

Cut off the connectors, skin and tin the leads
and then wire to the screw terminals on the boards

Figure 7-5 Terminal Designations for Meredian II Electrode with Quick Disconnect

122 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Inputs and Outputs Wiring

ORP
Wire Signal
Color Name
15

Cable shield (Yellow) 14

to chassis ground screw 13

12

11

Black or Orange 10 Reference

Shield 9 Guard
Red or Clear (center conductor of coax) 8 Glass (or ORP)
7

Some cables have connectors on the leads.

Cut off the connectors, skin and tin the leads
and then wire to the screw terminals on the boards

Figure 7-6 Terminal Designations for ORP

Wire Signal
Color Name
15

Cable shield (Violet) 14

to chassis ground screw 13

12

11

Orange 10 Reference
Black pigtail of Coax 9 Guard
Center conductor of Coax 8 Glass (or ORP)
7

Some cables have connectors on the leads.

Cut off the connectors, skin and tin the leads
and then wire to the screw terminals on the boards

Figure 7-7 Terminal Designations for Direct pH/ORP with

Quick Disconnect Option

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 123

Inputs and Outputs Wiring

HPW7000

Wire Signal
Color Name
15

Reference cable shield 14

(White with Green stripe)
13
to chassis ground screw
12
Reference
11
cable
Clear (center conductor of coax) 10 Reference
Measurement
cable shield Measurement White with Black stripe 9 Guard
(White with Green stripe) cable Clear (center conductor of coax) 8 Glass (or ORP)
to chassis Red 7 Counter
ground screw
Thermistor Jumper 6 RTH 3rd Wire
cable Black 5 RTH Low
White 4 RTH High

Thermistor cable shield 3

(White with Green stripe) 2

to chassis ground screw
1

Some cables have connectors on the leads.

Cut off the connectors, skin and tin the leads
and then wire to the screw terminals on the boards

Figure 7-8 Terminal Designations for HPW7000 System

124 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Inputs and Outputs Wiring

HB Series pH or ORP
Wire Signal
Color Name
15

14

13

12

11

White pigtail of Coax 10 Reference

9

Center conductor of Coax 8

Glass (or ORP)
7

Black 6 RTH Sense

Green 5 RTH Low
Red 4
RTH High

Figure 7-9 Terminal Designations for HB Series pH or ORP

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 125

Inputs and Outputs Wiring

7.5 pH Input from External Preamplifier/Cap Adapter Wiring Diagrams

Glass Meredian External Preamp1

Wire Signal
2
Color Name
Blue 15 (+) Volt Supply
Green 14 (–) Volt Supply
Black 13 Supply Common
12

Orange 11 pH Input Signal

10

Jumper terminals 5 and 6 6 RTH 3rd Wire

White 5 RTH Low
Red 4 RTH High
3

Figure 7-10 Terminal Designations for Meredian Electrode with External

Preamplifier
1
When using 022283 preamplifier module, jumper between “SC” and “ET” at the preamp
2
Color of wires corresponds to Honeywell cables:
Æ 834088
Æ 31075723
Æ 51309677-001

126 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Inputs and Outputs Wiring

Durafet II External Preamp

Wire Signal
Color Name
Blue 15 (+) 10 Volt Supply
Green 14 (-) 10 Volt Supply
Black 13 Supply Common
12

Orange 11 pH Input Signal

10

Jumper terminals 5 and 6 6 RTH 3rd Wire

White 5 RTH Low
4 RTH High
(note: do not connect red wire)
3

Figure 7-11 Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode with External

Preamplifier

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 127

Inputs and Outputs Wiring

Durafet II Cap Adapter

Wire Signal
Color Name
Blue 15 (+) 10 Volt Supply
Green 14 (-) 10 Volt Supply
Black 13 Supply Common
12

Orange 11 pH Input Signal

10

Red 6 RTH 3rd Wire Remove pre-wired

jumper at
Red with Black stripe 5 RTH Low
terminals 5 & 6
White 4 RTH High
3

Cable shield (yellow) 1

to chassis ground screw

Figure 7-12 Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode with Cap Adapter

128 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Inputs and Outputs Wiring

Durafet III Cap Adapter

Wire Signal
Color Name
Blue 15 (+) 10 Volt Supply
Green 14 (-) 10 Volt Supply
Black 13 Supply Common
12

Orange 11 pH Input Signal

10

Red 6 RTH 3rd Wire Remove pre-wired

jumper at
White 5 RTH Low
terminals 5 & 6
Red with Black stripe 4 RTH High
3

Cable shield (yellow) 1

to chassis ground screw

Figure 7-13 Terminal Designations for Durafet III Electrode with Cap Adapter

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 129

Inputs and Outputs Wiring

7.6 Conductivity

4 Wire Cond. 18AWG

(Has no shield)

Wire Signal
Color name

Black 10 Cell Low

9

White 7 Cell High

6 RTH 3rd Wire
Green 5 RTH Low
Red 4 RTH High
3

2
Wire to chassis 1 Earth Ground
ground screw

Figure 7-14 Terminal Designations for Conductivity with Integral Cable

4 Wire Cond. 18AWG

(Has no shield)

Wire Signal
Color name

Cable Shield (Violet) Yellow 10 Cell Low

to chassis ground screw 9

Center conductor of Coax 7 Cell High

Jumper 6 RTH 3rd Wire

Green 5 RTH Low
Red 4 RTH High
Brown 3

Blue 2

Wire to chassis 1 Earth Ground

ground screw

Figure 7-15 Terminal Designations for Conductivity Cells with Quick Disconnect

130 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Inputs and Outputs Wiring

7.7 Dissolved Oxygen

Wire Signal
Color Name
Cable shield (Blue)
to chassis ground screw Clear 10 Cathode
Green 9 Reference
Red 8 Anode
Black* 7 Guard
6

Yellow 5 RTH Low

Orange 4 RTH High
3

Wire to chassis 1 Earth Ground

ground screw
* Older Dissolved Oxygen probes may have a
White/Black Guard wire instead of a Black Guard wire.

Some cables have connectors on the leads.

Cut off the connectors, skin and tin the leads
and then wire to the screw terminals on the boards

Figure 7-16 Terminal Designations for Dissolved Oxygen with Integral Cable

CAUTION
When installing the probe, the wiring must be done in the order shown below even if the
analyzer is not powered. This is because the DO Input card is continuously supplying a
voltage (bias) to the terminals.

Connecting – Blue Shield wire first, then in this order:

Red
Green
Coax (clear)
Guard (Black)
Yellow
Orange
Disconnecting – Go in reverse
Orange – first
Yellow
Guard (Black)
Coax (clear)
Green
Red
Blue Shield Wire

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 131

Inputs and Outputs Wiring

Wire Signal
Color Name
Cable shield (Violet)
to chassis ground screw Clear 10 Cathode
Orange 9 Reference
Yellow 8 Anode
Black Pigtail of Coax 7 Guard
6

Green 5 RTH Low

Red 4 RTH High
3

Wire to chassis 1 Earth Ground

ground screw
Some cables have connectors on the leads.
Cut off the connectors, skin and tin the leads
and then wire to the screw terminals on the boards

Figure 7-17 Terminal Designations for Dissolved Oxygen with

Quick Disconnect Option

132 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Inputs and Outputs Wiring

7.8 Communications Card

RJ45 Ethernet
Connection

TX+ 4

TX- 3
RS 485
SHIELD 2 Connection
Wire to Chassis 1
Ground Screw

Figure 7-18 Terminal Designations for Communications Card

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 133

Inputs and Outputs Wiring

7.9 Outputs
Power Supply/Analog Output/Relay Output Card

Analog Output 1 (+) 13

Analog Output 1 (–) 12 Remove the Jumper

if you are using an
Analog Output 2 (+) 11
Analog Output
Analog Output 2 (–) 10

Relay Output 1 (N.O.) 9

Relay Output 1 (COM) 8

Relay Output 1 (N.C.) 7

Relay Output 2 (N.O.) 6

Relay Output 2 (COM) 5

Relay Output 2 (N.C.) 4

AC Hot L1

AC N L2

1 Case Earth Ground

Grounding Stud
on Case

Figure 7-19 Terminal Designations for Power, Analog Output, and Relay Output

134 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Inputs and Outputs Wiring

7.10 Option Card

Analog Output 3 (+) 15

Analog Output 3 (–) 14

Case (earth) Ground 13

Digital Input 1 (+)* 12

Digital Input 1 (–)* 11

Digital Input 2 (+)* 10

Digital Input 2 (–)* 9

Case (earth) Ground 8

Relay Output 3 (N.O.) 7

Relay Output 3 (COM) 6

Relay Output 3 (N.C.) 5

Relay Output 4 (N.O.) 4

Relay Output 4 (COM) 3

Relay Output 4 (N.C.) 2

Case (earth) Ground 1

* Contact Closure only

Figure 7-20 Terminal Designations for Option Board

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 135

Input Calibration

8 Input Calibration

8.1 Overview
Introduction
The section describes the calibration procedures for the following:
Input Cal – calibrate Input 1 and Input 2 for pH/ORP, Conductivity, or Dissolved
Oxygen.
For other Calibration Procedures refer to the sections listed below.
Output Cal – calibrate Analog Output 1, Analog Output 2, and Analog Output 3
(See Section 1).
Temp Input Cal – calibrate Temperature 1 and Temperature 2 for pH/ORP or
Conductivity (See Section 1).
For Calibration History, refer to Section 11.

What’s in this section?

The topics in this section are listed below.

Topic See Page

8.1 Overview 136

8.2 Calibration Menu 137
8.3 pH/ORP and Conductivity Overview 138
8.4 Recommendations for Successful Measurement and Calibration 139
8.5 pH Calibration 140
8.6 ORP Calibration 151
8.7 Conductivity Calibration 157
8.8 Dissolved Oxygen Calibration 166

136 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

8.2 Calibration Menu

Accessing the Main Calibration Menu and sub-menus
Calibrate
Press . The Main Calibration Menu will appear.

CALIBRATION
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

Use the keys to highlight the “Input PV Cal” selection.

Press Enter to display the sub-menu for that selection.
Depending on the Input board installed, you can select from:
IN 1 or 2 pH/ORP Cal
IN 1 or 2 Pre pH Cal
IN 1 or 2 Conduc Cal
IN 1 or 2 DO Cal
Use the keys to highlight the Input selection for calibration.

Refer to the following sections for “calibration instructions”:

8.5 pH Calibration Page 140
8.6 ORP Calibration Page 151
8.7 Conductivity Calibration Page 157
8.8 Dissolved Oxygen Calibration Page 166

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 137

Input Calibration

8.3 pH/ORP and Conductivity Overview

pH/ORP Calibration
Calibration of pH or ORP measuring instruments is necessary because similar electrodes
may produce slightly different potentials in the same solution, requiring a corrective
adjustment at the measuring instrument. Also, electrode outputs change over a period of
time, making periodic recalibration necessary for best performance. Determine
recalibration intervals based on operating experience.

Conductivity
Each type of cell has an associated cell constant entered during Configuration Setup. (See
Section 6.6) This number is part of the cell model number. However, for greater precision,
every Honeywell cell is individually tested at the factory, and a calibration factor unique to
that cell is determined. The cal factor for a cell can be found on the plastic tag hanging
from the cell lead wires. Instructions for entering this cell cal factor are in Section 6.6. The
UDA automatically uploads the Cal Factor from Honeywell cells with EEPROM. This
value is displayed in the “Setup” menu.
For some conductivity applications even greater accuracy is required. For those
applications it is possible to perform a calibration trim procedure. The Analyzer’s reading
can be adjusted while the associated cell is measuring a reference solution of known
conductivity, as described in Section 8.7. The same procedure can be used to adjust the
Analyzer’s reading while the cell is in the process, if a reference instrument is used to
determine the conductivity of the process. In this case the process fluid becomes the
“reference solution”.
Calibration trim is recommended for acid concentration applications above 5%.
Calibration trim can be reset as described in Section 8.7.
For accurate measurement of total dissolved solids (TDS) a conversion factor is entered
for each cell as described in Section 6.6.
ATTENTION
Any time a unit reset is performed; the TDS Value will be reset to 1.0. Calibration trim and cal
factor will be reset for cells.

138 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

8.4 Recommendations for Successful Measurement and Calibration

Selection and care of electrode system or cell essential
Successful measurements and calibration depend upon selection and care of the electrode
system or cells. Always prepare electrodes or cells and their mountings in accordance
with the instructions supplied with them, observing temperature, pressure and flow
limitations. Note the following recommendations:
pH/ORP Calibration
• Rinse electrodes thoroughly between buffer solutions.
• Always use HOLD, or otherwise deactivate control or alarm circuits before removing
electrodes from the process.
• Standardize with a buffer solution, which is at about the same temperature and pH as
the sample solution.
• Inspect and, if necessary, clean and/or rejuvenate the electrode system periodically
according to experience and conditions.
Conductivity Calibration
• For most accurate temperature measurement and compensation, insulate the outer body
of the cell to minimize the effect of ambient conditions on process temperature
measurement.
• Rinse the cells thoroughly with de-ionized water before immersing in a reference
solution.
• Always deactivate control or alarm circuits before removing cells from the process.
• Do calibration trim with a reference solution, which is at about the same temperature
and conductivity as the process solution.
• Inspect and, if necessary, clean the cells periodically according to experience and
conditions.

ATTENTION
For successful measurement in pure water applications where plastic piping is used, you may
have to provide an earth ground for the cell. Run a wire from the black electrode terminal of the
cell to one of the earth ground screws.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 139

Input Calibration

8.5 pH Calibration
8.5.1 Introduction
pH instrument calibration consists of standardization and slope adjustments.
Standardization is a pH Offset adjustment to compensate for electrode drift. Slope
adjustment is a span adjustment to match the gain of the instrument to the electrode output
response. For Durafet III pH electrodes, initial factory default value of offset and slope are
automatically uploaded by the UDA. These values will appear in the “pH/ORP Cal”
screens Table 8-2, step 4.
The analyzer supports two methods of calibration:
• With the “Buffering” method described in this section, you use your electrode
system to measure two reference solutions (“buffers”) having known pH values,
and then adjust the analyzer so that its readings match the actual pH of each.
ATTENTION
The two reference solutions must have a pH difference of at least 2.

• With the “Sample” method described in this section you measure your process,
both with your electrode system and with a separate (accurately calibrated) meter,
then adjust the analyzer so that its reading matches the meter.
ATTENTION
When a Durafet III pH electrode is replaced, its electrode calibration data
needs to be updated by the UDA2182 Analyzer. This is done either by
power cycling the analyzer or using the restart screen.

Using the restart screen

Press Action

Display Repeatedly until the One Input or Two Inputs display

screen appears.
Enter You will see:

Was probe replaced?

No

to change to Yes

Enter to restart the UDA.

140 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

8.5.2 Calibrating pH Electrodes Using Automatic Buffer recognition

Analyzer stores information on multiple buffers
The UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer contains (in its permanent memory) information
on several commonly used buffer solution standards in three groups, including the pH
versus temperature characteristics of each.
By command, the instrument will automatically select one of these buffers in the selected
group and use its values in the calibration process. Automatic checks are included to
ensure that reasonable and correct values are entered.
The procedure for using the automatic buffer recognition feature in an actual calibration is
provided in Table 8-2.
The standard pH Buffer values are listed in Table 8-1.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 141

Input Calibration

Calibration functions
Calibrating the pH Offset (Standardization) –. In auto buffer recognition calibration,
you can select one of the other buffer pH values directly above or below the
recognized buffer value in the current buffer group. (See Table 8-1.)
Calibrating the Slope - In auto buffer recognition calibration, you can select one of the
other buffer pH values directly above or below the recognized buffer value in the
current buffer group. (See Table 8-1.)
Table 8-1 Standard pH Buffer Values
Temperature °C 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Group Buffer

NIST/USP 1.68 1.67 1.67 1.67 1.67 1.68 1.68 1.68 1.69 1.69 1.70 1.71

4.01 4.01 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.01 4.01 4.02 4.03 4.04 4.06

6.86 6.98 6.95 6.92 6.90 6.88 6.86 6.85 6.84 6.84 6.83 6.83

9.18 9.46 9.40 9.33 9.28 9.23 9.18 9.14 9.10 9.07 9.04 9.01

12.45 13.42 13.21 13.01 12.80 12.64 12.45 12.30 12.13 11.99 11.84 11.71

USA 2.00 2.01 2.01 2.01 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00

4.00 4.01 3.99 4.00 3.99 4.00 4.00 4.01 4.02 4.03 4.04 4.06

7.00 7.13 7.10 7.07 7.05 7.02 7.00 6.99 6.98 6.97 6.97 6.97

10.00 10.34 10.26 10.19 10.12 10.06 10.00 9.94 9.90 9.85 9.82 9.78

12.00 12.60 12.44 12.28 12.14 12.00 11.88 11.79 11.66 11.53 11.43 11.32

Europe 1.00 0.98 0.98 0.99 0.99 1.00 1.00 1.01 1.01 1.01 1.01 1.02

3.00 3.02 3.02 3.02 3.02 3.00 3.00 2.99 2.99 2.98 2.98 2.97

6.00 6.03 6.02 6.01 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.01 6.02 6.04 6.05

8.00 8.15 8.11 8.07 8.03 8.00 7.97 7.94 7.91 7.88 7.87 7.86

10.00 10.22 10.17 10.12 10.05 10.00 9.95 9.90 9.86 9.82 9.78 9.74

13.00 13.81 13.60 13.39 13.19 13.00 12.83 12.68 12.53 12.38 12.25 12.11

142 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

Procedure
Make sure you have selected “PV Type –pH Glass, pH Durafet, or pH HPW” in the Inputs
configuration -Table 6-5.
Refer to Section 6.4.1 – General Rules for Editing.
Table 8-2 Calibrating pH Electrodes Using Automatic Buffer Recognition
Step Action Screen
1 Prepare containers of two
standard reference solutions.
2 Calibrate CALIBRATION
Press Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

Use to select
Input PV Cal
3 Enter PV INPUT CAL
Press In 1 pH/ORP Cal
In 2 Conduc Cal

Use to select
Input 1 or 2 pH/ORP Cal
4 Enter IN 1 pH/ORP Cal
Press Auto Buffer Cal
Buffer Cal
Sample Cal
Buffer Group
pH Offset
pH Slope
Reset pH Offset
Reset pH Slope

Use to select
”Buffer Group”
5 Enter Use to select
Press NIST/USP (default)
USA, or
Europe

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 143

Input Calibration

Step Action Screen

6 Enter IN 1 pH/ORP Cal
Press Auto Buffer Cal
Buffer Cal
Sample Cal
Buffer Group
pH Offset
pH Slope
Reset pH Offset
Reset pH Slope

Use to select
”Auto Buffer Cal”
7 • Put the unit in “Hold”
mode
• Remove the electrode
from the process.
• Rinse the electrode
thoroughly with distilled or
de-ionized water
8 Calibrating the pH Offset “Place probe in Buffer 1”
The display will show the pH of
Enter the buffer 1 solution as
Press measured by the electrode
Follow the prompts at the top system.
and bottom of the screen. The reading will be automatically
adjusted to match the known pH
value stored in the UDA2182
memory.
“Press Enter when stable”
9 Once the reading is stable “Buffer 1 stability check”
Enter Use to change the value of
Press the Buffer.
“Up/Down changes Buffer”
10 Rinse the electrode thoroughly
with distilled or de-ionized
water
11 Calibrating the Slope “Place probe in Buffer 2”
The display will show the pH of
Enter the buffer 2 solution as
Press measured by the electrode
Follow the prompts at the top system.
and bottom of the screen. The reading will be automatically
adjusted to match the known pH
value stored in the UDA2182
memory.
“Press Enter when stable”

144 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

Step Action Screen

12 Once the reading is stable “Buffer 2 stability check”
Enter Use to change the value of
Press the Buffer.
“Up/Down changes Buffer”
13 If the calibration fails, an error Error Messages:
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the Buffer span too low
screen. OFFSET UNDERRANGE
Make necessary adjustments OFFSET OVERRANGE
and re-calibrate.
Slope underrange
Slope overrange
Solution Unstable
Temp Too Low
Temp too High
See Table 12-2 for definitions

8.5.3 Buffering Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes

Recommended for most applications
This technique is recommended for best accuracy in most applications.
Materials
Materials required are:
• Two standard buffer reference solutions that are at least 2 pH apart from one another.
• A container for each, large enough to immerse the electrode to measuring depth.
• Distilled or de-ionized water to rinse the electrode.
Procedure
Make sure you have selected “PV Type –pH Glass, pH Durafet, or pH HPW ” in the
Inputs configuration - Table 6-5.
Refer to Section 6.4.1 – General Rules for Editing.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 145

Input Calibration

Table 8-3 Procedure for Buffering Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes

Step Action Screen
1 Calibrate
CALIBRATION
Press Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

Use to select
Input PV Cal
2 Enter
PV INPUT CAL

Press In 1 pH/ORP Cal

In 2 Conduc Cal

Use to select
Input 1 or 2 pH/ORP Cal
3 Enter
IN 1 pH/ORP Cal

Press Auto Buffer Cal

Buffer Cal
Sample Cal
Buffer Group
pH Offset
pH Slope
Reset pH Offset
Reset pH Slope

Use to select
Buffer Cal
4 • Put the unit in “Hold”
mode
• Remove the electrode
from the process.
• Rinse the electrode
thoroughly with distilled or
de-ionized water
5 Standardization (adjust “Place probe in Buffer 1”
instrument zero) The display will show the pH of
the buffer 1 solution as
Enter measured by the electrode
Press system.
Follow the prompts at the top
“Press Enter when stable”
and bottom of the screen.

146 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

Step Action Screen

6 Once the reading is stable “Change to Buffer 1 value”
Enter Use to change the value to
Press match the actual pH of the
Buffer 1 solution at its current
temperature.
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
7 Rinse the electrode thoroughly
with distilled or de-ionized
water.
8 Percent Theoretical Slope “Place probe in Buffer 2”
Adjustment The display will show the pH of
the buffer 2 solution as
Enter measured by the electrode
Press system.
Follow the prompts at the top
“Press Enter when stable”
and bottom of the screen.
9 Once the reading is stable “Change to Buffer 2 value”
Enter Use to change the value to
Press match the actual pH of the Buffer
2 solution at its current
temperature.
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
10 If the calibration fails, an error Error Messages:
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the Buffer span too low
screen. Slope (Percent Theoretical
Make necessary adjustments Slope) underrange
and re-calibrate Slope(Percent Theoretical
Slope) overrange
Solution Unstable
See Table 12-2 for definitions

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 147

Input Calibration

8.5.4 Sample Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes

Recommended where pH is stable, or for high-purity water applications
This method is recommended only where the pH is stable and changes very slowly. It is
also recommended for high-purity water measurement applications. Special instructions
for high-purity water applications are provided below.
Materials
To use the sample method, follow the instructions in Table 8-4.
Materials required are:
• A clean beaker for collecting the sample.
• A calibrated portable instrument for measuring pH of the sample.
• Distilled or de-ionized water to rinse the electrode.
Procedure
Make sure you have selected “PV Type –pH Glass, pH Durafet, or pH HPW” in the Inputs
configuration - Table 6-5.
Refer to Section 6.4.1 – General Rules for Editing.
Table 8-4 Procedure for Sample Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes
Step Action Screen
1 Prepare the Calibration meter.
2 Calibrate CALIBRATION
Press Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

Use to select
Input PV Cal
3 Enter PV INPUT CAL
Press In 1 pH/ORP Cal
In 2 Conduc Cal

Use to select
Input 1 or 2 pH/ORP Cal

148 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

Step Action Screen

4 Enter IN 1 pH/ORP Cal
Press Auto Buffer Cal
Buffer Cal
Sample Cal
Buffer Group
pH Offset
pH Slope
Reset pH Offset
Reset pH Slope

Use to select
Sample Cal
5 • Put the unit in “Hold”
mode
• DO NOT Remove the
electrode from the
process.
6 Enter “Place probe in Sample”
Press The display will show the pH of
Follow the prompts at the top the process as measured by the
and bottom of the screen. electrode system.
“Press Enter when stable”
7 Collect a beaker of the process sample from a point near the
electrode mounting and measure its pH value with a calibrated
portable instrument.
Special instructions for high-purity water applications
For a high purity water application, do not remove the sample
from the process for measurement. Bring the portable instrument
to the sampling site and measure a continuously flowing sample
that has not been exposed to air. This prevents lowering the
sample pH by absorption of carbon dioxide from the air.
8 Once the reading is stable, Change to Sample Value”
Enter Use keys to change the
press displayed value to match the
value on the portable meter.
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
9 If the calibration fails, an error Error Messages:
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the See Table 12-2.
screen.
Make necessary adjustments
and re-calibrate

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 149

Input Calibration

8.5.5 Viewing and resetting pH Offset and (Standardization) pH Slope

If the calibration is suspect, you can reset the pH Offset and pH Slope and calibrate again.
In the same screen as “Sample Cal”, use the keys to highlight “Reset pH Offset” or
“Reset pH Slope”.
IN 1 pH/ORP Cal
Auto Buffer Cal
Buffer Cal
Sample Cal
Buffer Group
pH Offset (Read only)
pH Slope (Read only)
Reset pH Offset
Reset pH Slope

Figure 8-1 Resetting pH Offset and pH Slope

Press ENTER. The pH Offset or pH Slope will be reset to (Factory calibration default for
Durafet III).

150 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

8.6 ORP Calibration

8.6.1 Introduction
ORP calibration consists of adjusting the reading of the analyzer to match a known value.
There are two types of ORP calibration supported:
• To calibrate the system to compensate for changes in electrode potentials over time,
the ORP electrode is placed in a reference solution of known ORP value, and the
analyzer reading is adjusted to match this value, as described in Section 8.6.
Instructions for preparing standard solutions are also provided below. These solutions
are stable for only short periods of time (less than 8 hours) and are only
approximations of ORP potentials.
• To calibrate the UDA2182 only, not the whole system including electrodes, apply a
known millivolt signal to the Analyzer instead of input from the electrode, then adjust
the UDA2182 reading to match the actual millivolt input, as described in Table 8-7.

8.6.2 ORP Calibration Using Reference Solution

Recommended to adjust for changes in electrode potential over time
An ORP measuring system can be checked by measuring a solution having a known
oxidation-reduction potential, then adjusting the UDA2182 to match. Although a
reference solution provides only an approximation of ORP potential, the system can be
adjusted periodically to compensate for changes in electrode potential over time.
Materials
The materials required to use the ORP standardization method are:
• A solution with a known oxidation-reduction potential. (See “Instructions for
preparing solution” below.
• A container for the solution, large enough to immerse the electrode to measuring
depth.
• Distilled or de-ionized water to rinse the electrode.
Instructions for preparing solution
To prepare an ORP standardization solution, dissolve 0.1 g of quinhydrone powder in
5 cc of acetone or methyl alcohol (methanol). Add this to not more than 500 cc of a
standard pH reference solution (buffer), about 1 part saturated quinhydrone to 100 parts
buffer solution. The oxidation potential of this solution is listed below for several
temperatures. The polarity sign shown is that of the measuring element with respect to the
reference element.
These solutions are unstable and should be used within eight hours of preparation.
All mV values in Table 8-5 have a ± 30 mV tolerance.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 151

Input Calibration

Table 8-5 Oxidation-Reduction Potential of Reference Solutions

at Specified Temperature
pH Buffer Solution Temperature
(Honeywell Part Number) 20 °C 25 °C 30 °C
4.01 @ 25 °C (31103001) 267 mV 263 mV 259 mV

6.86 @ 25 °C (31103002) 100 mV 94 mV 88 mV

7.00 @ 25 °C (not available from Honeywell) 92 mV 86 mV 80 mV

9.00 @ 25 °C **(not available from Honeywell) –26 mV –32 mV –39 mV

9.18 @ 25 °C (31103003) –36 mV –43 mV –49 mV

Procedure
Make sure you have selected “PV Type –ORP” in the Inputs configuration – Table
6-5
Refer to Section 6.4.1 – General Rules for Editing.
Table 8-6 Procedure for Calibrating ORP System Using a Reference Solution
Step Action Screen
1 Calibrate CALIBRATION
Press Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

Use to select
Input PV Cal
2 Enter PV INPUT CAL
Press In 1 pH/ORP Cal
In 2 Conduc Cal

Use to select
Input 1 or 2 pH/ORP Cal
3 Enter IN 1 pH/ORP Cal
Press Sample Cal
ORP Offset 0.000
Reset ORP Offset

152 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

Step Action Screen

4 Put the unit in “Hold” mode
Remove the electrode from
the process.
Rinse the electrode
thoroughly with distilled or de-
ionized water
5 Enter
Press
6 Follow the prompts at the top “Place probe in Sample”
and bottom of the screen. The display will show the
Oxidation Reduction Potential of
the reference solution as
measured by the electrode
system.
“Press Enter when stable”
7 Once the reading is stable “Change to Sample value”
Enter Use to change the value to
Press match the actual oxidation-
reduction potential of the
reference solution at its current
temperature.
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
8 Enter This will standardize the unit.
Press

9 Take the unit out of “Hold” and

return to the calibration menu.
10 If the calibration fails, an error Error Messages
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the Refer to Table 12-2.
screen.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 153

Input Calibration

8.6.3 ORP Calibration Using Voltage Input

Calibrates Analyzer only
The procedure described in this sub-section calibrates the Analyzer only. It does not
involve compensating for electrode drift. Instead, a known millivolt signal is applied to
the analyzer input terminals in place of the signal from the electrode, and the UDA2182 is
adjusted so that its reading matches the known input.

ATTENTION
This procedure can only be used when measuring ORP only

Materials
The materials required to calibrate the Analyzer using a voltage input are:
• A source of a known millivolt signal.
• A screwdriver to fit the Analyzer input terminal screws and the terminal retainer.
Procedure
Make sure you have selected “PV Type –ORP” in the Inputs configuration – Table 6-5.
Refer to Section 6.4.1 – General Rules for Editing.
To calibrate the ORP Analyzer using Voltage Input, follow the instructions in Table 8-7.

WARNING
This procedure should be performed by qualified personnel only. Disconnect the power
before opening the instrument case. A potentially lethal shock hazard exists inside the case if
the unit is opened while powered. More than one switch may be required to disconnect power.

Table 8-7 Procedure for Calibrating ORP Analyzer Using Voltage Input
Step Action Screen
1 Turn off the power to the Analyzer. More than one switch may be
required to disconnect power.
2 With the power off open the case:
Loosen the four captive screws on the front of the bezel.
Grasp the bezel on the right side. Lift the bezel gently and swing
the bezel open to the left. (The bezel and display assembly is
mounted on pivot arms.)
3 Refer to Figure 7-1 for the location of the terminal board retainer.
Loose the screws that hold the retainer and slide the retainer right
or left until the retainer tabs disengage from the terminal boards.

154 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

Step Action Screen

4 Insert a screwdriver into the tab in the terminal board to be wired
and pull. Slide the board half way out. There is a notch in the
terminal board into which you can slide the retainer tabs and hold
the boards in place while wiring.
5 Label and remove the input wiring from the input terminals.
Terminals 8 and 10.
(See Figure 7-6 Terminal Designations for ORP).
6 Feeding the test wiring through the conduit hole in the case,
connect a voltage supply to the 8 and 10 input terminals
• To apply a signal in the range 0 to 1600 mV, connect the plus to
8 and the minus to 10.
• To apply a signal in the range -1 to -1600 mV, connect the plus
to 10 and the minus to 8.
Slide the Input board back and close the case and power up the
unit. Do not apply power until the case is closed.
7 Calibrate PV INPUT CAL
Press In 1 pH/ORP Cal
In 2 Conduc Cal

Use to select
Input 1 or 2 pH/ORP Cal
8 Enter IN 1 pH/ORP Cal
Press Sample Cal
ORP Offset 0.000
Reset ORP Offset

9 • Put the unit in “Hold”

mode
10 Enter The display will show the
Press Oxidation Reduction Potential in
Millivolts.
The value should match the
Input signal.
11 Ignore the instructions to put the electrode in the reference
solution. Instead, apply an appropriate millivolt signal
(between –2000 and 2000 mV) to the input terminals.
To obtain a negative value, you must reverse the input to the unit
as described in Step 5.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 155

Input Calibration

Step Action Screen

12 Once the reading is stable, if it “Change to Sample value”
does not match the input Use to change the value to
Enter match the Voltage being applied
signal, press to the input terminals.
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
13 Enter This will standardize the unit.
Press

14 Take the unit out of “Hold” and return to the calibration menu.
15 Turn off the voltage source and turn off power to the Analyzer.
Do not open the case until power is disconnected.
16 Reconnect field wiring removed in Step 5.
17 Re-insert the terminal board into the case.
18 Close the case and power up the unit. Do not apply power until
case is closed.

8.6.4 Viewing and Resetting ORP Offset

If the calibration is suspect, you can reset the ORP Offset and calibrate again.
In the same screen as “Sample Cal”, use the keys to highlight “Reset ORP Offset”.
IN 1 pH/ORP Cal
Sample Cal
ORP Offset (Read only)
Reset ORP Offset

Figure 8-2 Resetting ORP Offset

Press ENTER. The ORP Offset will be reset to 0.000 (default).

156 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

8.7 Conductivity Calibration

8.7.1 Introduction
Each type of cell has an associated cell constant entered during Configuration setup (see
Section 6.6). This number is part of the cell model number. However, for greater
precision, every Honeywell cell is individually tested at the factory, and a calibration
factor unique to that cell is determined. The cal factor for a cell can be found on the plastic
tag hanging from the cell lead wires. Instructions for entering this cell cal factor are in
Section 6.6. The UDA automatically uploads the Cal Factor from Honeywell DL4XXX
type cells. This value is displayed in the “Setup” menu.
For some conductivity applications even greater accuracy is required. For those
applications it is possible to perform a calibration trim procedure. The Analyzer’s reading
can be adjusted while the associated cell is measuring a reference solution of known
conductivity, as described in Table 8-9. The same procedure can be used to adjust the
Analyzer’s reading while the cell is in the process, if a reference instrument is used to
determine the conductivity of the process. In this case the process fluid becomes the
“reference solution”.
Calibration trim is recommended for acid concentration applications above 5%.
Calibration trim can be removed as described in this section.
For accurate measurement of total dissolved solids (TDS) a conversion factor is entered
for each cell as described in Table 6-5 (Input1, Input 2, Conductivity).
8.7.2 Entering the Cal Factor for each cell

Introduction
Each type of cell has an associated cell constant; this number is part of the cell model
number. The constant for each cell is entered during Input setup. However, for greater
precision, every Honeywell cell is individually tested at the factory, and a calibration
factor unique to that cell is determined. The cal factor for a cell can be found on the
plastic tag hanging from the cell lead wires.

Procedure
If you have not done so already, refer to Table 6-5 (Input1/Input2/Conductivity) to enter
the cal factor for each cell
8.7.3 Determining and Entering the TDS Conversion Factor

Introduction
The UDA2182 measures conductivity. However, the process value can be displayed in
terms of total dissolved solids (TDS). If a TDS PV type was specified during Input setup
(Section 6.6), then the same menu in will contain an entry for the TDS conversion factor
for each cell.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 157

Input Calibration

8.7.4 Determining TDS conversion factor

To determine the TDS conversion factor, it is first necessary to establish the total
dissolved solids in a representative sample of the process. The formal determination of
TDS is a laboratory standard method performed on a weighed grab sample of the process
fluid. To summarize how to obtain a TDS value:
• Suspended solids, if present, are filtered out.
• All water is evaporated.
• The residue is dried and weighed.
• The result is divided by the original sample weight to obtain ppm TDS.
For detailed guidance in determining the official TDS, see “Standard Methods for the
Examination of Water and Wastewater,” jointly published by the American Public Health
Association, American Water Works Association and Water Pollution Control Federation,
Washington, DC.
To determine the conversion factor needed by the Analyzer, first use the laboratory
procedure summarized above to give an official TDS value. Next divide the TDS value by
the conductivity of the sample to yield the conversion factor for that particular process
fluid. The conversion factor is then entered into the analyzer to normalize the TDS
readout.
With power plant cation conductivity measurements, ion chromatography results may be
used to establish the conversion factor for readout in ppb chloride or sulfate ion. Nominal
values are 83 ppb per μS/cm for chloride ion and 111 ppb per μS/cm for sulfate ion. The
analyzer does not provide temperature compensation in TDS for chloride or sulfate ions.
Out-of range-values forced to closest limit
As long as the entered TDS value is within the acceptable limits for a given cell constant,
the Analyzer accepts the value. If a value is outside the accepted range, the unit will not
display an error message; instead it will force the value to either the high or low limit of
the range of the cell constant. Refer to Table 6-5 (Input1/Input2/Conductivity) for TDS
conversion factor defaults.
Calibrate the Analyzer before entering TDS conversion factor
If you intend to enter a cal factor or use calibration trim, do so before entering the TDS
conversion factor as described here.
If you use calibration trim, first set the solution temperature compensation in Table 6-5 to
the non-TDS choice for your process. For example, if you plan to use “NaCl” set the
solution temperature compensation type to “NaCl” temporarily for calibration purposes.
(Solution temperature compensation type is the one Input setup parameter that can be
changed without triggering a cold reset.)
Next, perform the calibration. Once calibration has been completed, go back to Input setup
and set the solution temperature compensation type to the TDS choice, for example
“NaCl”.
At this point you are ready to enter the TDS conversion factor as described in Table 6-5.

158 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

8.7.5 Performing Calibration Trim

Introduction
For most applications entering the cal factor for each cell will achieve satisfactory system
performance. However, it is possible to perform a calibration trim procedure in which the
Analyzer and cell combination are used to measure a reference solution of known
conductivity; the reading of the Analyzer is adjusted to match.
The same procedure can be used to adjust the Analyzer’s reading while the cell is in the
process, if a reference instrument is used to determine the process conductivity. In this
case, the process fluid becomes the “reference solution”.
Calibration trim is recommended for acid concentration measurements above 5%.
Materials
To perform calibration trim using a standard reference solution, follow the instructions in
Table 8-9.
Materials required are:
• A reference solution of known conductivity near the point of interest, with the
temperature controlled (or measured and compensated) to within ± 1 °C.
Conductivities of potassium chloride solutions are provided in Table 8-8. Solutions
must be prepared with high-purity de-ionized, CO2-free water, and dried potassium
chloride.
• For acid concentration applications, a certified reagent grade solution with the
temperature controlled.
• A container for the reference solution, large enough to immerse the cell to measuring
depth.
• De-ionized water to rinse the cell.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 159

Input Calibration

Table 8-8 Conductivity of Potassium Chloride Solutions at 25 °C

Concentration M* Conductivity (microSiemens
per cm)

0.001 147.0

0.005 717.8

0.01 1,413

0.02 2,767

0.05 6,668

* M = Molarity; 1M = 74.555g potassium chloride per liter of solution

Procedure
Table 8-9 Procedure for Performing Calibration Trim Using a Reference Solution
Step Action Screen
1 Calibrate CALIBRATION
Press Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

2 Enter PV INPUT CAL

Press In 1 pH/ORP Cal
In 2 Conduc Cal

Use to select
Input 1 or 2 Conduc Cal
3 Enter IN2 Conduc Cal
Press Sample Cal
Cal Trim 1.00
Reset Cal Trim

4 • Remove the cell from the

process.
• Rinse the cell thoroughly
with de-ionized water.

160 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

Step Action Screen

5 Enter
Press
6 Follow the prompts at the top “Place probe in Sample”
and bottom of the screen. The display will show the
conductivity of the reference
solution as measured by the cell
and Analyzer system.
“Press Enter when stable”
7 Once the reading is stable, “Change to Sample value”
Enter Use to change the value to
Press match the actual conductivity of
the reference solution at its
current temperature.
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
8 Enter This will save the Calibration
Press Trim Value. If the calibration trim
adjustment is successful, the
calibration menu will again be
displayed.
Return the cell to the process.
Repeat the operation for the
other cell.
9 If the calibration fails, an error Error Messages
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the Refer to Table 12-2.
screen.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 161

Input Calibration

8.7.6 Resetting Calibration Trim

If the calibration is suspect, you can reset the Calibration Trim and calibrate again.
In the same screen as “Sample Cal”, use the keys to highlight “Reset Trim”.

IN2 Conduc Cal

Sample Cal
Cal Trim 1.00
Reset Cal Trim

Figure 8-3 Resetting Calibration Trim

Press ENTER. The Calibration Trim will be reset to 1.00 (default).

162 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

8.7.7 Cation pH Calibration

The UDA allows for a sample calibration of the specific or influent pH value. Here an
independent sample is withdrawn from the sampling equipment and pH is determined with
equipment of known accuracy. This independent pH value is then entered into the UDA
as a pH calibration constant.
Recommended where pH is stable, or for high-purity water applications
This method is recommended only where the pH is stable and changes very slowly. It is
also recommended for high-purity water measurement applications. Special instructions
for high-purity water applications are provided below.
Materials
To use the sample method, follow the instructions in Table 8-4.
Materials required are:
• A clean beaker for collecting the sample.
• A calibrated portable instrument for measuring pH of the sample.
• Distilled or de-ionized water to rinse the electrode.
Procedure
Make sure both inputs are “Conductivity”.
Refer to Section 6.4.1 – General Rules for Editing.
Table 8-10 Procedure for Sample Method of Calibrating Cation pH
Step Action Screen
1 Prepare the Calibration meter.
2 Calibrate CALIBRATION
Press Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

Use to select
Input PV Cal
3 Enter
Press Input 1 Conduc
Input 2 Conduc
Cation pH

Use to select
Cation pH

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 163

Input Calibration

Step Action Screen

4 Enter CATION PH
Press Sample Cal
pH Offset 0.00
Rst pH Offset

Use to select
Sample Cal
5 • DO NOT Remove the
electrode from the
process.
6 Once the reading is stable, Change to Sample Value”
Enter Use keys to change the
press displayed value to match the
value on the portable meter.
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
7 Follow the prompts at the top “Cal Complete”
and bottom of the screen.
To recalibrate, press “Enter”.
“Enter = recal, Exit = exit”
8 If the calibration fails, an error Error Messages:
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the See Table 12-2.
screen.
Make necessary adjustments
and re-calibrate.

164 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

8.7.8 Resetting pH Offset

If the calibration is suspect, you can reset the Ph Offset and calibrate again.
In the same screen as “Sample Cal”, use the keys to highlight “Rst pH Offset”.

CATION PH
Sample Cal
pH Offset 0.00
Rst pH Offset

Figure 8-4 Resetting pH Offset

Press ENTER. The pH Offset will be reset to 0.00 (default).

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 165

Input Calibration

8.8 Dissolved Oxygen Calibration

Overview
The analyzer supports three methods of Dissolved Oxygen calibration:
Air Calibration - is done with the probe removed from the process. This is the
recommended method of calibration and should be completed unless the process set-up
prohibits removing the probe. This is recommended prior to installation as it saves
system parameters that are used in optimizing error diagnostics.
If the probe has just been removed from a sample low in dissolved oxygen, it takes
longer to complete a calibration than that of a probe that is already near ambient
conditions (sample high in dissolved oxygen).
Sample Calibration - Sample calibration allows a calibration based on a known
dissolved oxygen concentration where a DO value may be entered that is based on a
reference measurement. Sample calibration is usually executed by leaving the probe in
the measured sample and adjusting the Analyzer to agree with the sample dissolved
oxygen measured with a properly calibrated portable dissolved oxygen meter whose
probe is held very close to the process probe.
For those situations where sample calibration is preferred, it is recommended that an
Air Calibration be performed before the probe is put into service. It is also good
practice to Air Calibrate the probe once every 2 - 4 months of service.
Pressure Compensation - The concentration of oxygen dissolved in air-saturated
water depends on the air pressure. This dependence is automatically compensated for
during air calibration using a pressure sensor built into the Analyzer. The purpose of
the pressure calibration is to insure that the atmospheric oxygen level is known at the
time of air calibration. Pressure compensation is only employed at the time of Air
Calibration.
In this section there is also a procedure for running a Probe Bias Scan.

Do’s and Don’ts for Dissolved Oxygen Calibration

Do check the key parameters on the Display screen before performing an air
calibration for the first time. The parameters should be within the following ranges:
Pressure: 500 to 800 mmHg
Salinity: 0.0 if not being used
Temperature should be a stable reading
Don’t perform a probe bias test while the probe is in normal measurement service.
Don’t perform an air calibration while the probe is in either the ppm or ppb process
water.
Don’t perform a sample calibration when the Dissolved Oxygen reading is in the 0.0 -
2.0 ppb range.
Don’t measure the dissolved oxygen in gas streams or air streams. This product
measures dissolved oxygen in water.

166 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

Calibrating a Dissolved Oxygen Probe Using Air Calibration Method

Introduction
This is the simplest and most commonly used method of calibration.
ATTENTION
If “Initial Installation”, power probe and analyzer for 24 hours before first air calibration.

1. Assure that the probe has been powered for at least one hour.
2. Press the Hold button, if required.
3. Expose the probe to air (or air-saturated water) until the temperature and DO value
reading stabilizes.

Procedure
Table 8-11 Calibrating a Dissolved Oxygen Probe Using Air Calibration Method
Step Action Screen
1 Calibrate CALIBRATION
Press Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

2 Enter PV INPUT CAL

Press
In 1 DO Cal

Use to select
Input 1 or 2 DO Cal
3 Enter IN1 DO CAL
Press Air Cal
Sample Cal
Reset Cal Factor
Pressure Cal
Pressure Offset
Reset Prs Offset
Bias Scan
Bias Volts
Reset Bias Volts

Use to select
Air Cal

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 167

Input Calibration

Step Action Screen

4 Enter “Place probe in air”
Press The display will show the live
Follow the prompts at the top Dissolved Oxygen value.
and bottom of the screen.
Press Enter when ready”
5 Enter “Cal stability check”
Press
This screen remains until the Air
Calibration is complete. At that
time the previous screen is
displayed indicating that the air
calibration is complete.
“Wait for cal complete”
6 “ Cal Complete”
This screen gives you an option
to exit or recalibrate.
Press ENTER to recalibrate.
Press EXIT to return to Input Cal
Screen.
7 If the calibration fails, an error Error Messages
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the Readings Unstable
screen. Cal Factor Underrange
Cal Factor Overrange
Refer to Table 12-2.
Air Calibration is not completed until both the probe temperature and the probe signal are
stable. If the probe has just been removed from a sample low in dissolved oxygen or with
temperature significantly different from the air temperature, it takes longer to reach stability
than if the probe were already near ambient conditions when calibration was initiated.

168 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

Calibrating a Dissolved Oxygen Probe Using Sample Calibration Method

Introduction
Sample calibration allows a calibration based on a known dissolved oxygen concentration.
It is similar to air calibration except that the known DO value may be entered. Assuming
an accurate reference is available, use the sample calibration method rather than air
calibration if any of the following conditions apply:
• The air is below freezing (32°F, 0°C), or hot (above 104°F, 40°C) or very dry (below
20% relative humidity).
• The probe is mounted such that it is much easier to measure the concentration of the
DO in the water independently than to expose the probe to air. Such mounting is not
recommended but is sometimes necessary.
• The measurement interruption for air calibration cannot be tolerated.
Sample calibration is usually executed by leaving the probe in the measured sample and
adjusting the analyzer to agree with the sample dissolved oxygen measured with a
properly calibrated portable dissolved oxygen meter whose probe is held very close to the
probe of the analyzer. Alternatively, the probe may be removed from the measured sample
and placed in a sample of known dissolved oxygen concentration.

Procedure
Table 8-12 Calibrating a Dissolved Oxygen Probe Using Sample Calibration
Method
Step Action Screen
1 Power the probe for at least
one hour. (power the probe for
24 hours if initial installation)
2 Calibrate CALIBRATION
Press Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

3 Enter PV INPUT CAL

Press In 1 DO Cal

Use to select
Input 1 or 2 DO Cal

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 169

Input Calibration

Step Action Screen

4 Enter IN1 DO CAL
Press Air Cal
Sample Cal
Reset Cal Factor
Pressure Cal
Pressure Offset
Reset Prs Offset
Bias Scan
Bias Volts
Reset Bias Volts

Use to select
Sample Cal
5 • Put the unit in “Hold”
mode, if required.
6 Enter “Place probe in sample”
Press Immerse the probe in the sample
Follow the prompts at the top of known DO concentration and
and bottom of the screen. wait until the DO reading is
stable.
“Press Enter when stable”
7 Once the reading is stable, Change to sample value”
Enter Use the arrow keys to change
press the displayed value to match the
value of the known sample DO
concentration.
“Enter to save” when the value
displayed equals the known
sample DO concentration.
Exit to cancel”
8 Enter “ Cal Complete”
Press
This screen gives you an option
to exit or recalibrate.
Press ENTER to recalibrate.
Press EXIT to return to Input Cal
Screen.
9 Enter
Press

10 If the calibration fails, an error Error Messages:

message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the Cal Factor Underrange
screen. Cal Factor Overrange
Make necessary adjustments See Table 12-2.
and re-calibrate.

170 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

Calibrating the Integral Pressure Sensor

Introduction
The concentration of oxygen dissolved in air-saturated water depends on the barometric
pressure. This dependence is automatically compensated for during air calibration using a
pressure sensor built into the Analyzer. The purpose of the pressure calibration is to
calibrate that pressure sensor. However, this sensor has been factory calibrated and should
not require re-calibration.

Procedure
Determine the true ambient barometric pressure, such as from a calibrated pressure
transmitter or a mercury barometer. Absolute barometric pressure is required - not the
“relative” sea-level pressure normally reported by the weather bureau.
Table 8-13 Calibrating the Integral Pressure Sensor
Step Action Screen
1 Calibrate CALIBRATION
Press Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

2 Enter PV INPUT CAL

Press In 1 DO Cal

Use to select
Input 1 or 2 DO Cal
3 Enter IN1 DO CAL
Press Air Cal
Sample Cal
Reset Cal Factor
Pressure Cal
Pressure Offset
Reset Prs Offset
Bias Scan
Bias Volts
Reset Bias Volts

Use to select
Pressure Cal

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 171

Input Calibration

Step Action Screen

4 Enter “Pressure Sensor Cal”
Press Display shows the barometric
Follow the prompts at the top pressure value in mm Hg.
and bottom of the screen.
“Press Enter when stable”
5 Once the reading is stable, Change to sample value”
Enter Use the arrow keys to change
press the displayed value until the
displayed pressure in mmHg
agrees with the known pressure.
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
6 “ Cal Complete”
This screen gives you an option
to exit or recalibrate.
Press ENTER to recalibrate.
Press EXIT to return to Input Cal
Screen.
7 If the calibration fails, an error Error Messages:
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the See Table 12-2.
screen.
Make necessary adjustments
and re-calibrate.

Running a Probe Bias Scan

Introduction
The dissolved oxygen probe is an electrochemical cell, which produces an electric current
that is directly proportional to the concentration of oxygen dissolved in the sample in
which the probe tip is immersed. (When the probe is in air, the current is identical to that
produced when the probe is in air-saturated water.) This current is a direct measurement of
oxygen level. Usually, the probe is operated at -0.55V with respect to a reference electrode
within the probe. (The minus sign is omitted from the screen as well as from the
following discussion.) However, in some applications, the performance of the DO probe
can be enhanced by using other bias voltages. The purpose of this test is to evaluate
whether the probe bias voltage should be adjusted. Possible interference with probe
performance may also be inferred from the Probe Bias Test (PBT).

Test initiation
When the test is initiated, the bias voltage is adjusted down from its original value (usually
0.55V) at 25mV/sec until 0V is reached. Then the bias voltage is driven up to 1.0 V at
25mV/sec and finally, it is driven down again until it has returned to the value it had just

172 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

before the test was initiated. During this voltage sweep, the probe current is monitored and
the graph of current as a function of voltage is displayed.
If during the test the probe current rises above a factory-set upper limit, the bias voltage is
returned to its pre-test value at 25mV/sec and the test is terminated without completing the
full 1.0 Volt sweep. (The bias voltage test may also be terminated at any time by pressing
the “EXIT” button.)

Display Graph

Under normal conditions, the completed display shows a graph of current as a function of
voltage with the following features: from approximately 0 to 0.2 volts a fairly rapid
increase in current is observed; from approximately 0.2 to 0.8 volts, the current exhibits a
“flat” region where it is nearly independent of voltage and at some voltage above about 0.8
volts, the current rises quickly.

A typical current-voltage curve is shown below. The Sweep Bias millivoltage (along the
bottom of the graph) is a voltage from 0 -1V that is applied to perform the test. The
Operating Bias millivoltage is the current position of the cursor on the graph and
represents the current bias voltage. The horizontal axis numerals are in hundreds of
millivolts.

0.55V 80μA
240
160
80
μA 0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1V

Figure 8-5 Display of Probe Bias Test Done in Air

Note that the curve is quite flat at 0.55V. This means that even rather large changes in the
probe current-voltage characteristic do not affect the current (and, thus, probe sensitivity)
at 0.55V. In general, the curve formed by decreasing voltage is not identical to that formed
by increasing voltage. This hysteresis is a function of the voltage scan rate and may be
ignored.
The interpretation of figure shown above is as follows:
As the bias voltage of the oxygen-consuming electrode (relative to an internal reference
electrode) is increased, there is an initial increase in current as more and more of the
oxygen that approaches the electrode is reacted. However, at about 0.2V, the current stops
rising and a flat region, independent of voltage, is observed. It is in this region that probe
current is determined by oxygen mass transport limitation. Increasing the voltage cannot
increase the current because oxygen movement is diffusion limited. Finally, at a voltage

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 173

Input Calibration

exceeding 0.8 volts, a second process (water reduction) begins to occur and the current
again rises. To achieve stable results, the probe should be operated within the flat region
so that small changes in the probe characteristics result in negligible changes in probe
current.
In some industrial wastewater applications, particularly those in petroleum refineries,
active gases dissolved in the wastewater can cause this current-voltage characteristic to
shift, moving the flat region to other, usually lower, voltages. Also, in some very rare
instances, the chemical treatment of boiler water can cause this current-voltage
characteristic to shift, moving the flat region to other, usually lower, voltages.
To summarize, the Probe Bias Test automatically varies the probe voltage while
displaying the probe current as shown in the figure. At the completion of the test an
opportunity to change the bias voltage is provided. Thus, even where significant gaseous
contamination might otherwise interfere with the response of the probe to dissolved
oxygen, this advanced feature allows the probe to operate.
(If the results of the probe bias test should ever be significantly different from those shown
in the figure, Honeywell Service should be consulted.)

Procedure
Table 8-14 Running a Probe Bias Scan
Step Action Screen
1 Calibrate CALIBRATION
Press Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

2 Enter PV INPUT CAL

Press In 1 DO Cal

Use to select
Input 1 or 2 DO Cal
3 Enter IN1 DO CAL
Press Air Cal
Sample Cal
Reset Cal Factor
Pressure Cal
Pressure Offset
Reset Prs Offset
Bias Scan
Bias Volts
Reset Bias Volts

174 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

Step Action Screen

Use to select
Bias Scan
4 Enter You will see:
Press to initiate the IN1 BIAS SCAN
Bias Scan screen Enter to scan 0.55V 144μA
240
160
80
μA 0
At any time press “Exit” to 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1V

abort scan.
µA may be 0, 40, 80, 120
5 Enter Scan in Progress (Example)
Press to start scan
The bias voltage is adjusted down
from its original value (usually 0.55V)
at 25mV/sec until 0V is reached.
IN1 BIAS SCAN
Scanning 0.05V 13μA
240
160
80
μA 0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1V

Then the bias voltage is driven up to

1.0 V at 25 mV/sec until “Scan
complete” appears.
IN1 BIAS SCAN
Scan complete 0.90V 236μA
240
160
80
μA 0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1V

and finally, it is driven down again

until it has returned to the value it had
just before the test was initiated.
During this voltage sweep, the probe
current is monitored and the graph of
current as a function of voltage is
displayed.
IN1 DO BIAS SCAN
Ent=save, =Chng 0.55V 144μA
240
160
80
μA 0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1V

At the completion of the test an

opportunity to change the bias voltage
is provided.

Press to change the bias

voltage, or

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 175

Input Calibration

Step Action Screen

6 Enter Screen returns to “IN1 DO CAL”
Press to save screen. Bias Volts will be indicated on
the screen.

176 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Input Calibration

Resetting Pressure Offset or Bias Volts

If the calibration is suspect, you can reset any of these values and calibrate again.
In the same screen as “IN 1 DO Cal”, use the keys to highlight “Reset Prs Offset” or
“Reset Bias Volts”.
IN1 DO CAL
Air Cal
Sample Cal
Reset Cal Factor
Pressure Cal
Pressure Offset
Reset Prs Offset
Bias Scan
Bias Volts
Reset Bias Volts

Figure 8-6 Resetting Pressure Offset or Bias Volts

Press ENTER. The selected value will be reset to (default).

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 177

Outputs Calibration

9 Outputs Calibration

9.1 Overview
Introduction
The section describes the calibration procedures for the following:
Output Cal – calibrate Analog Output 1, Analog Output 2, and Analog Output 3
For other Calibration Procedures refer to the sections listed below.
PV Input Cal – calibrate Input 1 and Input 2 for pH/ORP, Conductivity or
Dissolved Oxygen (See Section 8)
Temperature Cal – calibrate Temperature 1 and Temperature 2 for pH/ORP or
Conductivity (See Section 1)
For Calibration History, refer to Section 11.

What’s in this section?

The topics in this section are listed below.

Topic See Page

9.1 Overview 178

9.2 Output Calibration 179

178 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Outputs Calibration

9.2 Output Calibration

Introduction
The UDA2182 is available with two standard and one optional analog outputs. The
output signals can be adjusted to trim the high and low output current or voltage values
over a range of ± 0.4 % of span to compensate for component tolerance variations.

Accessing the Main Calibration Menu and sub-menus

Calibrate
Press . The Main Calibration Menu will appear.

CALIBRATION
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

Use the keys to highlight the “Output Cal” selection.

Enter
Press to display the sub-menu for that selection.

Required equipment
Output calibration involves connecting a meter to the Analyzer’s output terminals.
The meter required for output calibration depends on the type of outputs.
• Current outputs: current meter capable of resolving 0.01 mA over the range 0 to 20
mA dc
• Voltage outputs: a 250 ohm ± 0.05 % shunt and a volt meter (capable of measuring 1
to 5 Vdc within 1 mV)
A screwdriver to fit the terminal block screws and the screw securing the terminal board
retainer is also required.

Procedure
To calibrate outputs, follow the procedure described in Table 9-1 Procedure for
Calibrating Analyzer Outputs. The output terminals are inside the case as shown in
Figures 6-1 through 6-6.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 179

Outputs Calibration

WARNING
While the unit is powered, a potentially lethal shock hazard exists inside the case. Do not open
the case while the unit is powered. Do not access the output terminal as described below while
the unit is powered.

WARNING
A disconnect switch must be installed to break all current carrying conductors. Turn off power
before working on conductors. Failure to observe this precaution may result in serious personal
injury.

180 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Outputs Calibration

Procedure
Table 9-1 Procedure for Calibrating Analyzer Outputs
Step Action Screen
1 Turn off the power to the Analyzer. More than one switch may
be required to disconnect power.
2 With the power off, open the case:
Loosen the four captive screws on the front of the bezel.
Grasp the bezel on the right side. Lift the bezel gently and swing
the bezel open to the left.
3 Refer to Figure 7-1 for the location of the terminal board retainer.
Loose the screws that hold the retainer and slide the retainer right
or left until the retainer tabs disengage from the terminal boards.
4 Insert a screwdriver into the tab in the terminal board to be wired
and pull. Slide the board half way out. - Refer to Figure 7-1 for the
location.
(Output 1 and 2 – Power Supply/Analog Output/Relay Output
card)
(Output 3 – Option card)
There is a notch in the terminal board into which you can slide the
retainer tabs and hold the boards in place while wiring.
5 Label and remove the field wiring from the output terminals.
Output 1 – Terminals 12– and 13+
Output 2 – Terminals 10– and 11+
Output 3 – Terminals 14– and 15+
6 Feeding the test wiring through the conduit hole in the case and
connect the appropriate type meter to the specific output terminals
Be sure to observe the correct polarity.
Slide the Input board back and close the case and power up the
unit. Do not apply power until the case is closed.
7 Calibrate CALIBRATION
Press Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

Use to select
”Output Cal”

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 181

Outputs Calibration

Step Action Screen

8 Enter OUTPUT CAL
Press Output 1
Output 2
Output 3

Use to select
an Analog Output to be
calibrated
9 Enter OUTPUT 1
Press 20mA Offset 0
4mA Offset 0
Reset 20mA Offs
Reset 4mA Offs

Use to select
” 20 mA Offset”
10 Enter
OUTPUT 1

Press 20mA Offset -147

4mA Offset 3
Reset 20mA Offs
Reset 4mA Offs

The right most digit will be

“blinking”.
11 To correct the value on the
meter:

• Use the keys to

increment or decrement the
value of the digit

• Use the keys to move

the cursor to the next digit.
• Repeat as required to
achieve a 20mA reading on
the test meter
• When all digits have been
changed, press “Enter” to
store the 20mA value.
Press “Exit” to cancel. The
previous value is retained.

182 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Outputs Calibration

Step Action Screen

12 Use to select
OUTPUT 1
20mA Offset -147
” 4 mA Offset” and repeat the 4mA Offset 3
process. Reset 20mA Offs
Reset 4mA Offs

13 Press “Enter” to store the 4mA

Offset value.
Press “Exit” to cancel. The
previous value is retained.
14 If the calibration is suspect,
you can reset the 20mA and
4mA Offset and calibrate
again.

To calibrate additional Outputs, repeat the above steps Including

powering down the unit before changing the connections to the
output terminals.
When output calibration has been completed, re-install the field
wiring removed in step 5. Disconnect power before opening
the case.
Close the case and power up the unit. Do not apply power until
the case is closed.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 183

Outputs Calibration

Viewing and resetting 20mA and 4mA Offset

If the calibration is suspect, you can reset the 20mAand 4mA Offset and calibrate again.
In the same screen as “20mA and 4mA Offset”, use the keys to highlight “Reset
20mA Offset” or “Reset 4mA Offset”.
OUTPUT 1
20mA Offset -147
4mA Offset 3
Reset 20mA Offs
Reset 4mA Offs

Figure 9-1 Resetting Output 1 Offsets (example)

Press ENTER. The 20mA Offset or 4mA Offset will be reset to 0(default).

184 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Temperature Input Calibration

10 Temperature Input Calibration

10.1 Overview
Introduction
The section describes the calibration procedures for the following:
Temp Input Cal – calibrate (T1) Temperature 1 or (T2) Temperature 2 for
pH/ORP or Conductivity
For other Calibration Procedures refer to the sections listed below.
PV Input Cal – calibrate Input 1 and Input 2 for pH/ORP, Conductivity or
Dissolved Oxygen (See Section 8)
Output Cal – calibrate Analog Output 1, Analog Output 2, and Analog Output 3
(See Section 1)
For Calibration History, refer to Section 11.

What’s in this section?

The topics in this section are listed below.

Topic See Page

10.1 Overview 185

10.2 Temperature Input Calibration 186

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 185

Temperature Input Calibration

10.2 Temperature Input Calibration

Introduction
Temperature Input Calibration lets you monitor a live temperature reading while
continuing to monitor the sample. The currently displayed temperature value can be
edited through a series of prompts on the screen. The temperature offset value is always
displayed in the temperature units selected in the Maintenance setup menu.

Accessing the Main Calibration Menu and sub-menus

Calibrate
Press . The Main Calibration Menu will appear.

CALIBRATION
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

Use the keys to highlight the “Input Temp Cal” selection.

Enter
Press to display the sub-menu for that selection.

Procedure
Table 10-1 Procedure for Calibrating the Temperature Inputs
Step Action Screen
1 Calibrate CALIBRATION
Press Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

Use to select
” Input Temp Cal”
2 Enter TEMP INPUT CAL
Press T1 pH/ORP Cal
T2 Conduc Cal

186 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Temperature Input Calibration

Step Action Screen

Use the keys to highlight

the desired “Temperature Input”
selection.
3 Enter T1 pH/ORP CAL
Press Temp Cal
Temp Offset (Read only)
Reset Tmp Offs

4 Enter
Press
5 Follow the prompts at the top “Place probe in sample”
and bottom of the screen. The display will show the
temperature of the reference
solution as measured by the
probe and Analyzer system.
“Press Enter when stable”
6 Once the reading is stable, “Change to sample value”
Enter Use to change the value to
Press match the actual temperature of
the reference solution at its
current temperature.
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
Limit is ± 5ºC (± 9ºF)
7 Enter This will save the Temperature
Press Offset value. If the calibration is
not successful, an error
message will be displayed.
8 If the calibration is suspect,
you can reset the
Temperature Offset and
calibrate again.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 187

Temperature Input Calibration

Viewing and resetting Temperature Offset

If the calibration is suspect, you can reset the Temperature Offset and calibrate again.
In the same screen as “Temp Cal”, use the keys to highlight “Reset Tmp Offset”.
T1 pH/ORP CAL
Temp Cal
Temp Offset (Read only)
Reset Tmp Offset

Figure 10-1 Resetting temperature offset

Press ENTER. The Temperature Offset will be reset to (default).

188 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Calibration History

11 Calibration History

11.1 Overview
Calibration History records every successful input or output calibration with timestamp,
with detail available on cal type and before and after cal values by scrolling and selecting
cal event name. Calibration records are listed top down from most recent to least recent.
Each line in the list consists of a calibration event name and the date and time of
occurrence.
Successful automatic cals from auto cycling also recorded and identified. Status warns of
cal history at 50% and 90% and when erasing old records.

Accessing the Main Calibration Menu and sub-menus

Calibrate
Press . The Main Calibration Menu will appear.

CALIBRATION
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History

Use the keys to highlight the “Cal History” selection. Press “Enter”.

Calibration Records
Table 11-1 Cal History items
Item Values Item Values
Calibration event In 1 PV Cal Calibration type Sample Conduc
name In 2 PV Cal Sample pH/ORP
In 1 Temp Cal Buffer pH 1
In 2 Temp Cal Buffer pH 2
Out 1 4mA Cal Auto Buffer pH 1
Out 1 20mA Cal Auto Buffer pH 2
Out 2 4mA Cal Auto Cycle pH 1
Out 2 20mA Cal Auto Cycle pH 2
Out 3 4mA Cal Sample DO
Out 3 20mA Cal Auto Air DO
Auto Cycle DO
The list is fully scrollable and individual records are selectable for further detail by
highlighting specific event names and pressing Enter. The calibration history has a
capacity of 128 records.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 189

Calibration History

11.2 Clear Calibration History

• Press Setup
to display the Main menu.
• Use the keys to select “Maintenance” then press Enter
to enter the sub-
menu.
• Use the keys to select “Display” then press Enter
to enter the sub-menu.
• Use the keys to select “Clr Cal Hist” then press Enter
to allow change.
• Use the keys to select “Yes” then press Enter
to clear the Calibration History
screen.

190 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Diagnostics and Messages

12 Diagnostics and Messages

12.1 Overview
Introduction
This section contains information on status and alarm messages, as well as on diagnostics
and system error messages and Fail messages. All these messages are displayed on the
“Status Message” stripe. If more than one message is active, the display will cycle
through all the messages, and then repeat the cycle.

What’s in this section?

The topics in this section are listed below.

Topic See Page

12.1 Overview 191

12.2 System Status Messages 192
12.3 Calibration Diagnostics 193
12.4 Auto Cycle Fail Messages 194
12.5 Pharma Fail Messages 195

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 191

Diagnostics and Messages

12.2 System Status Messages

Overview
The following table lists all the error messages that can appear for Measurement errors,
Input errors, Output errors, and Alarm Conditions.
Table 12-1 Status Messages
Status Message Definition
HOLD ACTIVE Analog Inputs (PVs) are held at their last active levels by
pressing the “HOLD” button, until cancelled by pressing the
“HOLD” button again.
n = 1 or 2 Measurement Errors
TEMP n UNDERRANGE Measured temperature is less than the minimum range value
according to measurement type, where: n is 1 (Input 1) or 2
(Input 2).
TEMP n OVERRANGE Measured temperature is greater than the maximum range
value according to measurement type, where: n is 1 (Input 1)
or 2 (Input 2).
PV n UNDERRANGE Measured PV is less than the minimum range value according
to measurement type, where n is 1 (Input 1) or 2 (Input 2).
PV n OVERRANGE Measured PV is greater than the maximum range value
according to measurement type, where n is 1 (Input 1) or 2
(Input 2).
n = 1 or 2 Input Errors – Output(s), for which Input is source, will go to failsafe level
PROBE TEMP n INPUT Probe temperature sensor at Input n is defective.
FAULT
PROBE PV n INPUT FAULT Probe PV sensor at Input n is defective.
PROBE n INPUT OUT OF Probe at Input n is out of solution.
SOLUTION
TEMP n INPUT OPEN Probe temperature sensor at Input n is not connected. Check
Wiring.
PV n INPUT OPEN Probe PV sensor at Input n is not connected. Check Wiring.
INPUT BOARD n FAULT An input board disconnect while powered results in an input
fault condition and this status message. The PV value is the
failsafe parameter value and the temperature is at the lower
limit of the input board’s temperature range.
Re-insert the input board, or cycle the unit’s power if the input
board is no longer needed.
n = 1, 2, or 3 Output Errors – Output in error goes to failsafe level
OUTPUT n OPEN Analog output n current is less than 3 mA and is less than
output minimum mA value. Check wiring.
n = 1, 2, 3, or 4 Alarm Conditions
ALARM n ACTIVE Alarm number n is currently active.

192 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Diagnostics and Messages

12.3 Calibration Diagnostics

pH/ORP/DO
All of the possible errors are detected during a probe calibration and will abort the
calibration process with the message “FAIL” appearing briefly, followed by a return to
the online pH/ORP/DO display. At that point, the specific error will be displayed as
described. In addition, any of following errors may occur during probe calibration and
abort the calibration process.
Table 12-2 Probe Calibration Diagnostics
Status Message Definition
BUFFER SPAN TOO LOW The span between pH buffer 1 and pH buffer 2 is less than 2 pH. Use a set of
buffers that are at least 2 pH apart. As a warning status, will clear when an
appropriate buffer 2 value is selected. As an error message, will abort
calibration and preserve original slope value.

OFFSET UNDERRANGE Resulting pH offset (standardization) value is less than –2 pH after pH slope
calibration. Calibration is aborted and original pH offset and slope values are
preserved.

OFFSET OVERRANGE Resulting pH offset (standardization) value is greater than 2 pH after pH slope
calibration. Calibration is aborted and original pH offset and slope values are
preserved.

SLOPE UNDERRANGE Resulting pH slope is less than 80%. Calibration is aborted and original slope
value is preserved.

SLOPE OVERRANGE Resulting pH slope is greater than 105%. Calibration is aborted and original
slope value is preserved.

CAL FACTOR UNDERRANGE Resulting DO calibration factor is less than 0.001268. DO calibration is
aborted and original calibration factor is preserved.

CAL FACTOR OVERRANGE Resulting DO calibration factor is greater than 0.040580. DO calibration is
aborted and original calibration factor is preserved.

PROBE CURRENT TOO LOW DO probe current is less than 5 µA. DO bias scan is aborted and original bias
voltage is preserved.

PROBE CURRENT TOO HIGH DO probe current exceeds the greater of 133% of the probe current at last
successful calibration or 160 µA. During DO bias scan, scan is aborted and
original bias voltage is preserved.

READINGS UNSTABLE DO air PV or temperature readings too unstable for successful air calibration.
Calibration is aborted and original calibration factor is preserved.

SOLUTION UNSTABLE pH solution PV or temperature readings too unstable for successful auto
buffer calibration. Calibration is aborted and original pH offset (for buffer 1) or
slope value (for buffer 2) is preserved.

SOLUTION TEMP TOO LOW pH solution temperature readings less than minimum of 0 degrees C. Auto
buffer calibration is aborted and original pH offset (for buffer 1) or slope value
(for buffer 2) is preserved

SOLUTION TEMP TOO HIGH pH solution temperature readings greater than maximum of 100 degrees C.
Auto buffer calibration is aborted and original pH offset (for buffer 1) or slope
value (for buffer 2) is preserved

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 193

Diagnostics and Messages

12.4 Auto Cycle Fail Messages

Overview
Auto Cycle Fail is active whenever an auto cycle failure has occurred. The status
message “Auto Cycle n Fail” is also displayed during a fail state. Once detected, the
current cycle proceeds immediately to the Probe Insert step (if enabled) or to the Resume
Delay step. The fail state remains for the duration of the Resume Delay, whereupon the
fail state returns to 0 and the fail message is cancelled. A fail state also provides a detail
message in the lower half of the Auto Cycle display regarding the specific reason for the
error. These messages are listed below:
Table 12-3 Auto Cycle Fail Messages
Fail Message Reason
Probe Extract Timeout Probe Transit enabled, Extract Wait Src not None and state not 0
within Max Transit Mins of start of Probe Extract.
Probe Insert Timeout Probe Transit enabled, Insert Wait Src not None and state not 0
within Max Transit Mins of start of Probe Insert.
Input Fault Input board, PV or temperature fault has occurred during calibration
(fault type in status message).
Solution Unstable PH PV or temperature not stable for calibration within elapsed time
limit Max Cal Mins.
Buffer Span Too Low Difference of PV reading for pH Cal 2 (Slope) and that of last pH Cal
1 (zero offset) < 1.8 pH.
Offset Underrange PH calibration has calculated and rejected a zero offset < -2 pH.
Offset Overrange PH calibration has calculated and rejected a zero offset > 2 pH.
Slope Underrange PH calibration has calculated and rejected a slope < 80 %.
Slope Overrange PH calibration has calculated and rejected a slope > 105 %.
Readings Unstable DO PV or temperature not stable for calibration within elapsed time
limit Max Cal Mins.
Probe Current Too Low Probe current is < 5 μA during DO calibration.

194 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Diagnostics and Messages

12.5 Pharma Fail Messages

Overview
Pharma Fail is active whenever a Pharma failure has occurred. Status messages are also
displayed during a fail state. These messages are listed below:
Table 12-4 Pharma Fail Messages
Warn Condition Diagnostic Message
Stage 1: Measured conductivity PHARMA n PV LIMIT WARN
exceeds Pct Warning value.
Fail Condition Diagnostic Message

Stage 1: Measured conductivity PHARMA n PV OVERLIMIT

exceeds 100%
Stage 1: Temperature not PHARMA n TEMP OVERRANGE
within range of 0 – 100 degrees PHARMA n TEMP UNDERRANGE
C.
Stage 2: Conductivity (due to PHARMA n PV OVERLIMIT
uptake of atmospheric carbon
dioxide) is 0.1 µS/cm or greater
per 5 minutes
Stage 3: pH not within range of PHARMA n PH OVERRANGE
5 – 7 pH.
PHARMA n PH UNDERRANGE
Stages 2 and 3: Temperature PHARMA n TEMP OVERRANGE
not within range of 24 – 26
PHARMA n TEMP UNDERRANGE
degrees C.
Status Condition Diagnostic Message

Stages 2 and 3: Pharma PHARMA n TIMER ACTIVE

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 195

Ethernet and Communications

13 Ethernet and Communications

13.1 Overview
For all information relating to the UDA2182 and Communications please refer to
the UDA2182 Communications User Guide #70-82-25-126.

196 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Accessories and Replacement Parts List

14 Accessories and Replacement Parts List

14.1 Overview
This section provides part numbers for field-replaceable parts and for accessories.

What’s in this section?

The topics in this section are listed below.

Topic See Page

14.1 Overview 197

14.2 Part Numbers 198

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 197

Accessories and Replacement Parts

14.2 Part Numbers

Introduction
Part numbers for field-replaceable parts and accessories are provided in Table 14-1.
Table 14-1 Part Numbers
Kit/Part Number Description Quantity
51453313-501 pH Input Card 1
50009551-501 pH for Preamp Input Card 1
51453316-501 Conductivity Input Card 1
51453319-501 ppm Dissolved Oxygen Input Card 1
51453319-502 ppb Dissolved Oxygen Input Card 1
51453518-502 Bezel Assembly 1
51453540-501 Power Supply Card 1
51453328-501 Additional Analog & (2) Relay card 1
50010239-501 Rear Case and CPU Card 1
50010610-501 PID Control Field Update 1
50001619-001 Process Instrument Explorer Software 1
50025563-501 Communications Card 1

198 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

15 Appendices

15.1 Table of Contents

Topic See Page

PH/ORP
15.2 Appendix A – Entering Values for Lead Resistance Compensation 200
15.3 Appendix B – Entering Values for Lead Resistance Compensation [Titanium Cells] 202
15.4 Appendix C - Cyanide Waste Treatment 204
15.5 Appendix D – Chrome Waste Treatment 208
Conductivity/Resistivity
15.6 Appendix E – Two-cell Applications 212
15.7 Appendix F – Using a Precision Check Resistor 216
(For Conductivity)
Dissolved Oxygen
15.8 Appendix G – Noise Testing, Dissolved Oxygen Application 218
15.9 Appendix H – DO Probe and Analyzer Tests 219
15.10 Appendix I – Parameters Affecting Dissolved Oxygen Measurement 222
15.11 Appendix J – Discussion on Chemical Interferences on Measured DO Currents 223
15.12 Appendix K – Percent Saturation Readout 225
15.13 Appendix L – Leak Detection in PPB Applications 226
15.14 Appendix M – Procedure for Low Level ppb Dissolved Oxygen Testing 227
15.15 Appendix N – Sample Tap Electrode Mounting Recommendations 229
15.16 Appendix O – Auto Clean and Auto Cal Examples 231

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 199

Appendices

15.2 Appendix A – Entering Values for Lead Resistance Compensation

(See Appendix B for titanium cells mounted into stainless steel flow chamber 31079198)

Introduction
If you use standard Honeywell cell lead lengths of 7 or 20 feet connected directly to the
Analyzer, no compensation for lead resistance is necessary. Similarly, if a junction box
is used to extend the leads up to 150 feet, no compensation is required. However, if
longer leads are used (greater than 150 feet), signal accuracy can be adversely affected
unless you enter information that will permit the UDA2182 to compensate for lead
resistance in the black and white cell leads only. Lead resistance compensation is not
necessary, nor applied to the other cell leads.
For lengths up to 1000 feet*, simply specify the gauge and length as described in Table
6-5. Note that the maximum wire size for sensor inputs at the input terminal board is
16AWG.
* DirectLine DL4000 series cells have a total lead length limit of 250 feet.
If mixed wired gauges are used, or lead length or wire gauge are not within the stated
ranges, the UDA2182 can still perform the compensation. However, you must first
calculate the lead resistance, and then put it in terms of the available settings for AWG
gauge and length.
The resistance of each available gauge choice (in copper wire) is:
16 AWG = 4.0 ohms per 1000 feet
18 AWG = 6.4 ohms per 1000 feet
20 AWG = 10.2 ohms per 1000 feet
22 AWG = 16.1 ohms per 1000 feet
For example, suppose extension cables between the cell and Analyzer consist of 500 feet
of 18-gauge wire and 200 feet of 16-gauge WIRE. The cell has the TC head option.

500 ft of 18 AWG wire 200 ft. of 16 AWG wire

Analyzer
Honeywell
Junction Conductivity Cell
Box

Figure 15-1 Example of a Conductivity Loop

Because there are two different types of wire used in each lead to the cell in this example,
the total lead resistance is calculated as follows: (Note: the analyzer accounts for the fact
that there is always a pair of conductor wires in the system loop.)
(0.5 x 6.4) + (0.2 x 4.0) = 4.0 ohms

200 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

Since the analyzer only allows entry of one wire gauge type, we allow for the worst-case
condition by dividing the total resistance by the resistance per thousand feet of the higher
resistance gauge wire. In our example this would be:
4.0 ohms ÷ 6.4 ohms per thousand feet of 18 AWG wire = 625 feet
Therefore, in our example we would use the procedure in Table 6-5, and specify the wire
gauge as 18 AWG and the length as 625 feet.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 201

Appendices

15.3 Appendix B – Entering Values for Lead Resistance Compensation

[Titanium Cells]
(4973 or DL4311 Titanium cells mounted in stainless steel flow chamber 31079198)

Introduction
If you use standard Honeywell cell lead lengths of 7 or 20 feet connected directly to the
Analyzer, no compensation for lead resistance is necessary. Similarly, if a junction box
is used to extend the leads up to 150 feet, no compensation is required. However, if
longer leads are used (greater than 150 feet), signal accuracy can be adversely affected
unless you enter information that will permit the UDA2182 to compensate for lead
resistance in the black and white cell leads only. Lead resistance compensation is not
necessary, nor applied to the other cell leads.
For lengths up to 1000 feet*, simply specify the gauge and length as described in Table
6-5. Note that the maximum wire size for sensor inputs at the input terminal board is
16AWG. Coax cable is recommended for extension of the black and white cell leads.
* DirectLine DL4000 series cells have a total lead length limit of 250 feet.
If mixed wired gauges are used, or lead length or wire gauge are not within the stated
ranges, the UDA2182 can still perform the compensation. However, you must first
calculate the lead resistance, and then put it in terms of the available settings for AWG
gauge and length. Because the smaller gauge coax cables consist of a low resistance
shield and a higher resistance conductor, an average equivalent resistance is used for
calculations, i.e. 20 AWG wire is used to simulate 22AWG coax.
The resistance of each available gauge choice (in copper wire) is:
16 AWG = 4.0 ohms per 1000 feet
18 AWG = 6.4 ohms per 1000 feet
20 AWG = 10.2 ohms per 1000 feet
(Use 18 AWG values for Input Configuration and calculations)
22 AWG = 16.1 ohms per 1000 feet
(Use 20 AWG values for Input Configuration and calculations)
For example, suppose extension cables between the cell and Analyzer consist of 200 feet
of 22-gauge coax and 500 feet of 18-gauge coax. The cell has the TC head option.

500 ft of 18 AWG coax 200 ft. of 22 AWG coax

Analyzer
Honeywell
Junction Conductivity Cell
Box

Figure 15-2 Example of a Conductivity Loop

202 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

Because there are two different types of wire used in each lead to the cell in this example,
the total lead resistance is calculated as follows: (Note: the analyzer accounts for the fact
that there is always a pair of conductor wires in the system loop.)
(0.5 x 6.4) + (0.2 x 10.2) = 5.24 ohms
Since the analyzer only allows entry of one wire gauge type, we allow for the worst-case
condition by dividing the total resistance by the resistance per thousand feet of the higher
resistance gauge wire. In our example this would be:
5.24 ohms ÷ 10.2 ohms per thousand feet of 22 AWG wire = 514 feet
Therefore, in our example we would use the procedure in Table 6-5, and specify the wire
gauge as 20 AWG and the length as 514 feet. (20 AWG wire simulates 22 AWG coax)

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 203

Appendices

15.4 Appendix C - Cyanide Waste Treatment

Introduction
Uses of cyanide solutions
Cyanide solutions are used in plating baths for zinc, cadmium, copper, brass, silver and
gold. The toxic rinse waters and dumps from these operations require destruction of the
cyanide (typically to a level below 0.1 ppm) before its discharge.
Technique for cyanide destruction
The technique most often used for cyanide destruction is a one or two-stage chemical
treatment process. The first stage raises the pH and oxidizes the cyanide to less toxic
cyanate. When required, the second stage neutralizes and further oxidizes the cyanide to
harmless carbonate and nitrogen. The neutralization also allows the metals to be
precipitated and separated from the effluent.
Consistent treatment and stable control in this type of process requires well-mixed
reaction tanks with enough volume for adequate retention time. See Figure 15-3.
Retention time is calculated by dividing the filled or usable tank volume by the waste
flowrate. Typically it is 10 minutes or more.

PROPORTIONAL RECORDER
CAUSTIC
NOTE: The separate pH and ORP
ACID measurements and control shown
ON/OFF

in the first stage may be handled

ON/OFF

with a single UDA2182 Analyzer

ON/OFF with combined input.
HYPOCHLORITE pH ANALYZER
ORP pH CONTROLLER
HYPOCHLORITE
CYANIDE ORP
WASTE

CYANIDE TO CYANATE CYANATE TO CARBONATE SETTLING SLUDGE

AND NEUTRALIZATION

Figure 15-3 Cyanide Treatment System

204 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

First Stage of Cyanide Destruction

Raise pH and oxidize cyanide
Sodium hydroxide (caustic) is used to raise the effluent to about 11 pH, which will
promote the oxidation reaction and ensure complete treatment. The oxidizing agent is
usually sodium hypochlorite, NaOCl. The reaction for the first stage is given below using
the NaOCl and with cyanide expressed in ionic form (CN- ). The result is sodium cyanate
(NaCNO) and chloride ion (Cl- ).
NaOCl + CN − → NaCNO + Cl −
This first-stage reaction is analyzed and controlled by independent control loops: caustic
addition by pH control and oxidizing-agent addition by ORP control (redox potential or
ORP, oxidation-reduction potential). Often an ON-OFF type of control using solenoid
valves or metering pumps can be used. The pH controller simply calls for more caustic
whenever pH falls below 11. The ORP controller calls for additional hypochlorite
whenever ORP potential falls below about +450 mV. (The metal ORP electrode is
positive with respect to the reference electrode.)
Titration curve
The ORP titration curve in Figure 15-4 shows the entire millivolt range if cyanide is
treated as a batch. For continuous treatment, operation is maintained in the oxidized,
positive region of the curve near the +450 mV setpoint. The ORP setpoint can vary
between installations, depending upon pH, the oxidizing agent, the presence of various
metals in solution, and the type of reference electrode used. Determine the exact setpoint
empirically at that potential where all the cyanide has been oxidized without excess
hypochlorite feed. This point can be verified with a sensitive colorimetric test kit or
similar check for cyanide.

+600 pH= 10.5

pH= 11.0

+400
REDOX POTENTIAL (mV)

+200

-200

-400
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
VOLUME OF HYPOCHLORITE ADDED

Figure 15-4 First Stage Cyanide Oxidation - Typical Titration Curve

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 205

Appendices

Importance of pH control
As shown in Figure 15-4, pH has a direct effect on the ORP potential and must be closely
controlled to achieve consistent ORP control, especially if hypochlorite is used as the
oxidizing agent. Hypochlorite raises pH, which lowers the ORP potential, which in turn
calls for additional hypochlorite -- a runaway situation. To avoid this situation, use close
pH control and locate the ORP electrode at a distance from the hypochlorite addition
point.
Reliable measurement with gold electrode
For this application, a gold ORP electrode gives a more reliable measurement than does a
platinum electrode, because platinum may catalyze additional reactions at its surface and
is more subject to coating than gold. Note that the solubility of gold in cyanide solutions
does not present a problem as it is in contact, primarily, with cyanide. In fact, a slight loss
of gold serves to keep the electrode clean.

Second Stage of Cyanide Destruction

Neutralize and further oxidize cyanate
The wastewater is neutralized in order to promote additional oxidation and to meet the
discharge pH limits. Typically, sulfuric acid is added to lower the pH to about 8.5. At this
pH the second oxidation occurs more rapidly.
WARNING
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious
injury.
An interlock must be provided to prevent the addition of acid before the
positive oxidation of ALL cyanide. Failure to observe this precaution can
result in the generation of highly toxic hydrogen cyanide.

Additional chlorine or sodium hypochlorite (NaOCl) can be added in proportion to that

added in the first stage, or by separate ORP control to complete the oxidation to sodium
bicarbonate (NaHCO3) in the following reaction:
2 NaCNO + 3NaOCl + H2O → 2 NaHCO3 + N2 + 3NaCl
ORP control in the second stage is very similar to that in the first stage, except that the
control point is near +600 mV. Control of pH in the second stage is more difficult than in
the first stage, because the control point is closer to the sensitive neutral area.
Proportional type pH control is often used.
Removal of suspended metal hydroxides
Following the second stage, a settling tank and/or a filter can be used to remove
suspended metal hydroxides. However, further treatment may be required to lower
concentrations of some metals below their hydroxide solubilities.

206 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

Batch Treatment
Sequence of steps
Continuous treatment is shown in Figure 15-3. However, all of the reactions can be
achieved with semi-automatic batch control. Only a single tank with a pH controller and
an ORP controller are required. The steps are sequenced, and the pH and ORP setpoints
are changed to give the same results as for the continuous treatment. Caustic is added to
raise pH to 11; then hypochlorite is added to raise the ORP potential to about +450 mV
while more caustic is added as required to maintain 11 pH.
WARNING
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious
injury.
An interlock must be provided to prevent the addition of acid before the
positive oxidation of ALL cyanide. Failure to observe this precaution can
result in the generation of highly toxic hydrogen cyanide.

Then the acid can be added to neutralize the batch and further oxidation will complete the
cyanate-to-carbonate conversion. A settling period can then be used to remove solids, or
the batch can be pumped directly to another settling tank or pond.

ORP Potential a Measure of Status of Reaction

Cyanide is reducing ion
An oxidation-reduction reaction involves the transfer of electrons from the ion being
oxidized to the oxidizing agent. In cyanide destruction, chlorine or hypochlorite accepts
electrons from the cyanide, oxidizing it, while simultaneously the hypochlorite is reduced
to chloride. ORP potential is a measure of the status of the oxidation-reduction reaction;
i.e., the gold electrode detects the solution’s ability to accept or donate electrons. The
hypochlorite, an oxidizing ion, accepts electrons, which makes the electrode more
positive. The cyanide, a reducing ion, provides electrons and makes the electrode more
negative. The net electrode potential is related to the ratio of concentrations of reducing
and oxidizing ions in the solution.
Potential cannot be used as monitor of effluent
This electrode potential is extremely sensitive in measuring the degree of treatment in the
reaction tank. However, it cannot be related to a definite concentration of a cyanide or
cyanate; therefore it cannot be used as a monitor of final effluent concentration.
Importance of clean electrode
Reliable ORP measurement requires a very clean metal electrode surface. Routinely
clean the electrodes with a soft cloth, dilute acids, and/or cleaning agents to promote fast
response.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 207

Appendices

15.5 Appendix D – Chrome Waste Treatment

Use of Chromates
Corrosion inhibition
Chromates are used as corrosion inhibitors in cooling towers and in metal-finishing
operations including bright dip, conversion coating, and chrome plating.
Necessity for removal of chromium ion from wastewater
The wastewater form rinse tanks, dumps, and cooling tower blowdown contains toxic
soluble chromium ion, Cr+6, which must be removed, typically to a level less than 0.5
ppm before discharge.
Technique for chrome removal
The technique most often used for this chrome removal is a two-stage chemical treatment
process. The first stage lowers the pH and adds the reducing agent to convert the chrome
from soluble Cr+6 to Cr+3. The second stage neutralizes the wastewater, forming insoluble
chromium hydroxide, which can then be removed.
Consistent treatment and stable control in this type of process requires well-mixed
reaction tanks with enough volume for adequate retention time (see Figure 15-5).
Retention time is calculated by dividing the filled or usable tank volume by the waste
flowrate. Typically, it is ten minutes or more.

RECORDER
PROPORTIONAL

ACID NOTE: The separate pH and ORP

measurements and control shown
ON/OFF

in the first stage may be handled

with a single UDA2182 Analyzer
CAUSTIC
ON/OFF

with combined input

BISULFITE Ph ANALYZER/
ORP pH CONTROLLER

CHROME
WASTE
POLYELECTROLYTE

REDUCTION NEUTRALIZATION SETTLING

SLUDGE

Figure 15-5 Chrome Treatment System

208 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

First Stage of Chrome Removal

Lower pH and add reducing agent
Sulfuric acid is used to lower the pH to about 2.5, which promotes the reduction reaction
and ensures complete treatment. The reducing agent may be sulfur dioxide, sodium
sulfite, sodium bisulfite, sodium metabisulfite, sodium hydrosulfite, or ferrous sulfate.
The reaction is given below. The chromate is expressed as chromic acid, CrO3, with a +6
charge on the chromium and the reducing agent is expressed as sulfurous acid, H2SO3,
which is generated by sulfites at low pH. The result is chromium sulfate, Cr2(SO4)3, with
a +3 charge on the chromium. The reaction is expressed as:
2CrO3 + 3H2SO3 → Cr2 (SO4 )3 + 3H2O
This first stage reaction is analyzed and controlled by independent control loops: acid
addition by pH control; reducing-agent addition by redox potential or ORP (oxidation-
reduction potential) control. Often an ON-OFF type of control using solenoid valves or
metering pumps can be used. The pH controller simply calls for additional acid whenever
the pH rises above 2.5. The ORP controller calls for additional reducing agent whenever
the ORP potential rises above about +250 mV. (The metal ORP electrode is positive with
respect to the reference electrode.)
Titration curve
The ORP titration curve in Figure 15-6 shows the entire millivolt range if Cr+6 chrome is
treated as a batch. With continuous treatment, operation is maintained in the fully
reduced portion of the curve near the +250 mV setpoint. The ORP setpoint can vary
between installations, depending on pH, reducing agent, presence of additional
contaminants and dissolved oxygen, and the type of reference electrode used. Determine
the exact setpoint empirically. This ORP setpoint should be at a potential where all of the
Cr+6 has been reduced without excess sulfite consumption, which can release sulfur
dioxide gas. This point can be verified with a sensitive colorimetric test kit or similar
check.
700

600

pH= 2

500
REDOX POTENTIAL (mV)

400

pH= 3
300

200

100
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
VOLUME OF BISULFATE ADDED

Figure 15-6 Chrome Reduction - Typical Titration Curve

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 209

Appendices

Chrome reduction is slow enough that 10 to 15 minutes may be required for a complete
reaction and this time increases if pH is controlled at higher levels. The pH also has a
direct effect on the ORP potential as shown in Figure 15-6. Therefore, pH must be
controlled to achieve consistent ORP control.

Second Stage of Chrome Removal

Neutralize the wastewater
In this stage the wastewater is neutralized to precipitate the Cr+3 as insoluble chromium
hydroxide, Cr(OH)3. Another reason is to meet the discharge pH limits. Sodium
hydroxide or lime is used to raise the pH to 7.5 to 8.5 in the following reaction.
Cr 2(SO4 )3 + 6 NaOH → 3Na2SO4 + 2Cr (OH )3
pH control point close to neutral point
Control of pH in the second stage is more difficult than in the first because the control
point is in the sensitive area closer to the neutral point. Although this reaction is fast, for
stability, a retention time of at least 10 minutes is usually needed for continuous
treatment. Proportional pH control is often used in this stage.
Remove suspended chromium hydroxide
Subsequently, a settling tank and/or filter will remove the suspended chromium
hydroxide. Flocculating agents are helpful in this separation.

Batch Treatment
Sequence of steps
Continuous treatment for chrome removal is shown in Figure 15-5. However, all of the
reactions can be achieved with semi-automatic batch control. Only a single tank with a
pH controller and an ORP controller are required. The steps of the treatment are
sequenced, and the pH setpoint is changed to give the same results as for the continuous
treatment. Acid is added to lower pH to 2.5; then reducing agent is added to lower ORP
potential to +250 mV. After waiting a few minutes to ensure a complete reaction (and
possible test for Cr+6), the sodium hydroxide is added to raise pH to 8 as in the second
stage of the continuous treatment. The settling period then begins, or the batch is pumped
to a separate settling tank or pond.

ORP Potential a Measure of Status

Sulfite is reducing ion
An oxidation-reduction reaction involves the transfer of the electrons from the reducing
agent to the ion being reduced. In the chrome removal application, sulfur in the sulfite
ion donates electrons to reduce the chromium; simultaneously the chromium oxidizes the
sulfur. The ORP potential is a measure of the status of the oxidation-reduction reaction;
the platinum or gold electrode detects the solution’s ability to accept or donate electrons.
Sulfite (SO3+2), a reducing ion, donates electrons which makes the electrode more

210 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

negative. The chromium, an oxidizing ion, Cr+6, accepts electrons and makes the
electrode more positive. The net electrode potential is related to the ratio of
concentrations of reducing and oxidizing ions in the solution.
Potential cannot be used as monitor of effluent
This electrode potential is extremely sensitive in measuring the degree of chrome
treatment in the reaction tank. However, it cannot be related to a definite concentration of
chrome and, therefore, cannot be used as a final effluent monitor of chrome
concentration.
Importance of clean electrode
Reliable ORP measurements require a very clean metal electrode surface. Clean the
electrodes routinely with a soft cloth; dilute acids, and/or cleaning agents to promote fast
response. Control at low pH levels in the first stage of treatment has also been found to
help maintain clean ORP electrodes.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 211

Appendices

15.6 Appendix E – Two-cell Applications

Ion Exchange
Ion exchange operations can achieve especially precise control using the conductivity
ratio of two points with each bed. Ratio measurement accounts for feedwater variations
when the upstream point is measured at the cation bed inlet. With the upstream point in
the bed as shown for following stages, it can identify exhaustion before breakthrough.

INLET
CELL 2

CELL 2 CELL 2
CELL 1 CELL 1 CELL 1 DI WATER
CATION BED ANION BED MIXED BED

Reverse Osmosis
Reverse Osmosis efficiency is monitored by comparing inlet and outlet conductivity (or
TDS). Automatic calculations of Percent Rejection or Percent Passage are provided. If
readout is in resistivity, cell locations are interchanged. Temperature readout assists with
normalized performance comparisons.

CELL 2 CELL 1
RO UNIT

FEED • • PERMEATE

CONCENTRATE
Cell1 x100
Percent Passage = Typical Range is 0 to 20%
Cell2
Cell1
Percent Rejection = (1- Cell2 ) x100 Typical Range is 80 to 100%

Conductivity/Resistivity/TDS Difference
Conductivity/Resistivity/TDS difference using redundant cells on critical processes can
provide a valuable diagnostic capability. If the difference in measurements exceeds the
alarm points, an operator is summoned for corrective action. Monitoring may be switched
to the alternate cell during maintenance. For deviation in either direction, two different

212 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

alarms (+ and -) are used. A difference kind of diagnostic can be provided by a precision
check resistor in place of one cell to give continuous Analyzer/Controller checking at one
value. Also see 15.11 Appendix J – Discussion on Chemical Interferences on Measured
DO Currents.

UDA2182 ANALYZER

OUTPUT SIGNAL

DIFFERENCE ALARM

CELL 1 CELL 2
PROCESS

Parts Rinsing
Parts rinsing is usually controlled by conductivity to obtain adequate rinsing without
wasting excess water, whether a single stage or a counter-current series of tanks. The
two-cell ratio approach can determine whether inadequate rinsing is due to low flowrate
or due to poor supply water quality.

CELL 2 CELL 1
PARTS FLOW

WASTE WATER
RINSE
WATER

Conductivity Ratio = Cell1 Typical Ratio Range is 0.1 to 1.1

Cell2

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 213

Appendices

Softener Monitor
Softener monitoring by conductivity ratio gives a continuous indication of performance.
Sodium is typically more conductive than the hardness minerals it displaces, yielding a
higher conductivity at the outlet. A ratio approaching 1 indicates that hardness ions are
breaking through and that regeneration is needed.

(HARD) WATER SUPPLY CELL 2

CELL 1
(SOFT) TREATED WATER

Softening Ratio = Cell1 Typical Ratio Range is 1 to 1.25

Cell2

Steam Power Measurements

The three conductivity measurements in power plants relate to water chemistry
parameters as follows:
• Specific conductivity -- chemical treatment level
• Cation conductivity -- total anion contaminants
• Degassed conductivity -- non-volatile anion contaminants
• Cation minus degassed conductivities -- carbon dioxide

214 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

SPECIFIC CATION
CONDUCTIVITY CONDUCTIVITY
UDA2182
ANALYZER

SAMPLE
CELL 1 CELL 2
CATION
EXCHANGER

SPECIFIC DEGASSED
CONDUCTIVITY CATION CONDUCTIVITY
CONDUCTIVITY UDA2182 (ANIONS)
UDA2182 ANALYZER
ANALYZER

CARBON DIOXIDE
BY CALCULATION

SAMPLE
CELL 1 CELL 2
CATION
EXCHANGER REBOILER

Sodium Hydroxide and Hydrochloric Acid Concentration Measurements

The measurement range of sodium hydroxide by conductivity is limited by temperature.
The conductivity is limited by temperature. The conductivity of sodium hydroxide
reaches a maximum value near 14% at 0º C and 29% at 100º C. Near the maximum there
is poor resolution and no reliable way to know which side of the peak is being measured.
Therefore, the UDA2182 measurement range is restricted by temperature to assure
reliable values. Maximum concentrations are 10% at 0º C, 13% at 25º C and 20% at 75º
C and above, with linear interpolation between these points. Operation above these limits
gives a flashing display.
The measurement range of hydrochloric acid is restricted to less than 15.5% above 40º C
and less than 18% below 40º C.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 215

Appendices

15.7 Appendix F – Using a Precision Check Resistor

(For Conductivity)
Introduction
The operation of the Analyzer/Controller can be verified by replacing the input from a
cell with a precision check resistor across the Analyzer/Controller input terminals. In
addition, an 8550 ohm resistor (Honeywell Part No. 31233300) can be wired in place of
the inputs from the temperature compensator to simulate 25º C, the reference
temperature. The unit will display a simulated “process value” appropriate for the check
resistor installed. (Equations showing the relationship between resistor rating and
displayed value are provided below.) If the displayed value is incorrect, the
Analyzer/Controller should be serviced.
This technique can be used two ways:
• Offline - Install the precision check resistor temporarily in place of the input from
either cell to check the operation of the Analyzer/Controller. When correct operation
has been verified, remove the resistor and replace the field wiring.
• Online - To provide a constant check of the Analyzer/Controller’s operation in a
critical process, connect the conductivity cell to the Cell 1 input terminals; instead of
a Cell 2 input, install a check resistor at the Cell 2 input terminals. The Cell 2
“process value” should always be the appropriate value for the resistor (see equations
below). Configure an alarm to monitor this value.

Set cal factor and calibration trim for ideal conditions

When a check resistor is used instead of cell input, the Analyzer/Controller must be set
for theoretically ideal conditions to achieve display of the appropriate value for the
installed resistor. This means that you set the cell calibration factor to 1.00 and remove
the calibration trim for the cell input being replaced by the check resistor.

Calculations for conductivity, resistivity, and TDS

To verify instrument operation at any point of measurement, calculate the check
resistance needed to simulate that value. (It is assumed that you have selected a display
measurement value that is within the range of your cell constant; see 2.1for ranges.) The
equation used depends on the measurement type. For concentration check values see the
table on the following page.
Conductivity check resistance (ohms) = Cell Constant (cm-1) x 106
Conductivity (microSiemens/cm)
Resistivity check resistance (ohms) = Cell Constant (cm-1) x Resistivity (ohm-cm)
TDS check resistance (ohms) = Cell Constant (cm-1) x 106
TDS (ppm)/TDS factor
(TDS factor has units of ppm/microSiemens-cm-1)

216 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

Example 1: To determine the check resistor value needed to simulate conductivity

measurement of 10 μS, use cell constant 0.1 and perform the following calculation:
10 k ohms = (0.1) x (1,000,000)
10
Example 2: To determine the check resistor value needed to simulate resistivity
measurement of 10 M ohms, use cell constant 0.01 and perform the following
calculation:
100 K ohms = (0.01) x (10,000,000)

Concentration values
Obtain the appropriate check resistance value from the table below.
Table 15-1 Data for Concentration Range Measurements
Material/Weight % Concentration Simulation Resistance (ohms) @ 25º C
Cell Constant
10 25 50
Hydrochloric Acid (HCl)
0 ∞ ∞
1 242.5 485.0
4 68.9 137.7
Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4)
0 ∞ ∞ ∞
1 215.5 538.7 1077.4
4 56.0 140.0 280.0
Sodium Chloride (NaCl)
0 ∞ ∞ ∞
1 574.1 1435.1 2870.3
4 195.2 398.0 796.1
Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH)
0 ∞ ∞ ∞
1 189.2 473.0 946.1
4 54.0 135.1 270.1

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 217

Appendices

15.8 Appendix G – Noise Testing, Dissolved Oxygen Application

Hints for Reducing Noise
Specifications for proper operation of Honeywell dissolved oxygen (DO) probes demand
that the alternating current (AC) voltage signal (noise) between anode and shield
connections and cathode and shield connections be less than 1 mV AC.
While it is your responsibility to assure that this specification is met, the following are
some hints that have been successful in reducing these signals to the required value in a
variety of installations.
1. First eliminate external connections as a source of excess AC noise.
2. After installation of all wiring, use a digital voltmeter to check the following
voltages:
Anode - Shield 1.2 to 2.0 VDC depending on oxygen level
less than 1 mV AC. In low ppb measurements, this
value may be zero.
Cathode - Shield < 1 mV DC
less than 1 mV AC
3. Any readings greater than the limits shown above indicate electrical noise that should
be corrected.
4. Systematically remove external connections to the Analyzer, noting if the voltage
drops within the acceptable limit.
5. If a noise source is identified, improved shielding, grounding or re-routing of that
cable may be required. (In attempting to reduce AC noise, do not ground the shield as
this shunt filtering is designed to reduce electromagnetic interferences {EMC}.)
6. If the measured voltages are greater than procedures states, one at a time remove an
external connection (ex., isolated outputs and relays) and re-measure the AC signal. If
the AC signal has decreased after disconnecting one of these connections, then this
was the source of the noise.
7. If the noise remains at a value greater than 1 mV AC after disconnecting all external
connections described in step 1, disconnect the shield wire from Terminal 7 and
connect it to instrument ground inside the case.
8. If the noise remains at a value greater than 1 mV AC after performing step 2,
reconnect the shield wire to Terminal 7 and connect an additional (jumper) wire from
ground to the shield connection, Terminal 7.
If these steps fail to reduce the Anode-Shield and Cathode-Shield AC signals to the
specified 1mV AC or less, obtain an isolated transformer and power the analyzer from
that.

218 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

15.9 Appendix H – DO Probe and Analyzer Tests

Before performing air leak detection, it is necessary to determine that both Probe and
Analyzer are working properly.
Assumptions:
• The probe and analyzer should be connected, the analyzer powered-up, and the probe
in the process water for at least 24 hours prior to testing.
• No additional configuration should be done.
• The process is as it would be normally. All equipment in the process is online and
contributing to the process. This is to ensure that the Probe and Analyzer are working
in a known environment.

Check for probe membrane leakage

If the probe has membrane leaks, incorrect readings may occur. Follow this procedure to
check for probe membrane leakage:
1. Remove probe from analyzer and process.
2. Using either the flow chamber or original protective adapter, screw this piece on the
probe. If using the adapter, wrap electrical tape around the adapter to seal the holes.
3. Next, wrap electrical tape around the hole on the side of the probe. The intent is to
create a reservoir for the sealed probe.
4. Position probe with the membrane pointing up.
5. Make a solution of salt water using 2 T. of salt and 8 oz. of water.
6. Fill the probe (via the adapter or flow chamber opening) with the salt water until
water is overflowing from the top of the reservoir.
7. If using the adapter or a PVC flow through chamber, place a wire (uncurled paper
clip) in adapter or flow through chamber opening such that one end is immersed in
the salt water solution. If using a Stainless Steel (SS) flow chamber, you do not need
the wire.
8. Using a DVM that can measure Mohms, attach one DVM lead to the paper clip (or
touch side of SS flow through chamber) and the other DVM lead to the cathode
(black lead). Measure the impedance between the Cathode and the wire (probe side).
If the probe has no leakage problem, this resistance will be greater than 1 Mohm. Go
to Step 10. If the reading is in the k ohms or ohms range, there is a leak in the
membrane, which can cause erratic readings in the probe. Stop any further testing
until the probe is replaced.
9. If you are here, it has been confirmed that there are no membrane leaks in the DO
probe. Remove the tape and wire from probe and rinse probe with tap water. Go to
Steps 9 – 16 on the following pages.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 219

Appendices

Check that analyzer is working

1. Remove power from analyzer.
2. Disconnect the probe and put the following resistor values on the terminal block of
the analyzer:
• Jumper (bare wire) - Anode(8) to Ref(9)
• 10k resistor - Ref(9) to Cathode(10)
• 5k resistor across thermistor leads - 4 and 5
3. Turn analyzer back on.
4. If you see a reading of between 5 and 10 ppm or 5000 and 10000 ppb at 25°C, the
analyzer is working correctly.
5. If not, the analyzer maybe the problem. Consult Honeywell TAC for support.

Check that the analyzer and probe are working together correctly.
1. If not already done, connect the probe to the analyzer and power up the analyzer. Put
probe in a bucket of water for approx. 1 hour so it can stabilize before proceeding.
2. Expose probe to ambient air for 3-5 minutes or until the temperature is stable.
3. Press the Display key on the Analyzer until the following parameters DO,
TEMPerature, SALinity, and PRESSure are showing on the analyzer’s display.
4. Perform a Visual Check on these parameters while the probe is in ambient Air:
5. The Temperature is not flashing and is between 15 - 35 Deg C.
6. DO’s Barometric Pressure is approx. in the range of 500 to 600 mmHg.
7. The Salinity value should be 0.0 PPT. (Indicates that Salinity is turned OFF).
8. If any of the above parameters are incorrect, make the necessary changes to correct
them so that they are as stated above.
9. Perform an air calibration.
10. When air calibration is completed, look at the DO value and the Temperature on the
Analyzer’s display.
11. Confirm that these two parameters are correct by comparing them to values in Table
15-1. If the measured values are not similar to the table, the probe is suspect, call
*TAC for assistance.
12. With probe still in air, perform a Probe Bias Test under the Maintenance Menu.
13. When completed, the display should look exactly like Figure 8-5 under Probe Bias
Test. If it does, move to Step 16.
14. If the problem is a shift of the curve either to the left or right of the cursor, move the
cursor so that it is positioned on the flat portion of the curve. At this point, the probe
is suspect and should be sent to the Technical assistance Center for analysis. If the

220 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

problem is that the cursor is positioned too far to the left or right of the flat portion of
the curve, move the cursor back to the flat portion of the curve.
15. Perform another Air Calibration to correct any changes that occurred during the PBT.
16. If you reached this point, you have both a working probe and analyzer that are
calibrated to one another correctly.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 221

Appendices

15.10 Appendix I – Parameters Affecting Dissolved Oxygen

Measurement
The actual quantity of oxygen that can be present in solution is governed by the partial
pressure of the gas in the atmosphere, the solubility in solution, the temperature and
purity of the solution.
Pressure
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzers include an internal pressure sensor and software
algorithm that automatically compensates for atmospheric pressure variations during
calibration. Pressure variations have a direct effect on the dissolved oxygen concentration
during normal measurement so no pressure compensation is applied at that time. The
information given below is only for reference to published solubility tables and is not
needed for operation of the Analyzer.
The equilibrium concentration of oxygen dissolved in a liquid is directly proportional to
the partial pressure of oxygen in the vapor phase with which the solution is in contact.
Dry air, which contains 20.9% oxygen, will have an oxygen partial pressure of 159
mmHg if the total pressure is 760 mmHg. Tables of oxygen solubility are normally
referenced to this value. An altitude or pressure correction must be made when conditions
differ from this level. The correction is made using the following equation:
S = S’ (P - p)/(760 - p)
where:
S is the solubility at barometric pressure of interest (P)
S’ is the solubility at 760 mmHg at a given temperature
P is the barometric pressure
p is the partial pressure of water at the given temperature
Temperature
Honeywell dissolved oxygen probes and analyzers include temperature sensors and an
automatic temperature compensation algorithm. The algorithm takes the raw oxygen
signal from the probe (which is proportional to the partial pressure of oxygen) and
converts it into the actual concentration of oxygen at the measuring temperature. The
algorithm is based on the decreasing solubility of oxygen with increasing temperature
and on the probe temperature coefficient.
Salinity
The significant effect of dissolved solids on reducing oxygen solubility is well
documented. However, the partial pressure of oxygen (raw oxygen probe signal) is the
same whether in pure or saline water. Since the actual solubility is reduced, a correction
must be made when measuring brackish, sea or other water containing much more than 1
ppt (1000 ppm) of dissolved solids. The Analyzer includes a salinity correction
algorithm, which uses input from a fixed value of salinity in ppt (parts-per-thousand)
entered from the front panel. Suspended and settled solids have negligible effect on
solubility, but may affect the transfer rate of oxygen when in excess of 2%.

222 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

15.11 Appendix J – Discussion on Chemical Interferences on

Measured DO Currents
There are four contributors to measured current:

Faradaic Currents
Faradaic currents are those resulting from oxidation or reduction of chemical species.
The reduction of oxygen to water, the oxidation of water to oxygen, and the oxidation of
hydrogen, hydrazine or sulfur dioxide, are examples of Faradaic currents.

Residual Currents
Residual currents are unwanted Faradaic currents caused by impurities in the probe
electrolyte. These impurities are metals (e.g. lead, zinc) in electrolyte reagents, which are
capable of being reduced at the cathode and give rise to zero offset currents at “zero ppb
oxygen”.

Electrode Conditioning Currents

The platinum cathode and anode materials are actually made up of conducting platinum
oxides. These oxides exist at the molecular level. The actual platinum surface state
strongly affects the observed Faradaic currents. Before methods of wire conditioning
were established, upwards of 96 hours was needed to allow these conditioning currents to
stabilize. Once wire-conditioning methods were established, it now takes approximately
24 hours for these conditioning currents to completely stabilize. Electrode conditioning
currents occur on first probe power-ups, following power interruptions of more than 1
second (back-up power is provided for the probe to prevent this current during a power
outage of 1 hour or less) and following a Probe Bias test.

Charging Currents
The Dissolved Oxygen (DO) probe consists of closely spaced bi-filar platinum windings
separated by a high dielectric constant material. This is a description of a capacitor; the
capacitance of a DO probe is in the hundreds if microFarads. When the probe is scanned
during a Probe Bias Test(PBT) at 25mV/sec, an appreciable charging current is
observed. This is equivalent to several hundred ppb dissolved oxygen.
The purpose of the PBT is to verify the optimum operating range of the current/voltage
curve. It further allows one to determine if a reference shift has occurred. Most
importantly, it allows one to select to identify a new bias point, if one is needed. To
employ this diagnostic, you should be in air or air saturated water (ppm current is in uA
range). A PBT should not be performed in a ppb application (ppb current is in nA range),
due to charging and electrode currents being at a maximum value (µA range) during one
of these scans. Furthermore, the final current rise during the PBT produces both
hydrogen and oxygen gases within the probe. Time is needed before these gases can re-
establish equilibrium with the outside sample. Therefore, the PBT should be limited to air
level conditions and adequate time should be allowed for probe recovery following a
PBT.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 223

Appendices

Faradaic Interferences
The DO probe responds to oxygen partial pressure as follows:
O2 + 4H+ + 4e- → 2H2O (1)
Reaction (1) is a chemical reduction in which dissolved oxygen is reduced to water. This
reduction occurs at the working electrode, commonly referred to as the cathode. The
equal and opposite (oxidation) reaction occurs at the counter electrode (anode). Any
gaseous substance, which is permeable through the membrane and is capable of being
oxidized or reduced (electroactive) at the working electrode will interfere. Cl2, O3, H2,
N2H4 and SO2 are examples of interfering dissolved gases.
Cl2+ 2e- → 2Cl- (2)
H2 → 2H+ + 2e- (3)
Reaction (2) is a reduction and hence a positive interference will be observed; reaction
(3) is an oxidation, which will result in a negative interference. All amperometric probes
are subject to reduction or oxidation interference as shown above. In addition to the
direct interference shown in these two equations, the equilibrium probe provides an
additional indirect interference. In normal probe operation oxygen is consumed at the
working electrode and an equal amount of oxygen is produced at the counter electrode.
In a positive interference condition, such as (2) above, chlorine is reduced at the working
electrode and an equivalent amount of oxygen is produced at the anode. This oxygen is
electroactive, along with the dissolved chlorine and is a contributor to the measured
current.
In the absence of dissolved oxygen and in a negative interference situation as in (3),
hydrogen gas is consumed at the working electrode and the opposite reaction, the
reduction of water to hydrogen gas occurs at the counter electrode. In this hydrogen
interference mode, the probe is both consuming and producing equal amounts of
hydrogen, and is operating in a hydrogen detection equilibrium mode.
In cases of electrochemical interference, if the interference is positive, dissolved oxygen
will be produced at the counter electrode giving a perceived higher oxygen reading. If
the interference is negative, dissolved hydrogen gas will be produced at the counter
electrode giving a perceived zero oxygen reading.

Sulfite Based Zero Testing

Often as a quick check to determine if a DO probe can reach 0.0 ppb, you can immerse
the probe in a solution of sodium sulfite (Na2SO3) or sodium meta bisulfite (Na2S2O5). A
2 to 5% by weight solution in water is sufficient. If available, a small level of coboltous
ion CO2+ will act as a catalyst and speed up the reaction of oxygen with the scavenger.
Note: The lifetime of this solution is related to its exposure to air. Namely, the greater the
exposure, the shorter the lifetime.
However, a Honeywell proven low ppb DO test using Nitrogen, an oxygen displacer, is
recommended in Appendix M – Procedure for Low Level ppb Dissolved Oxygen Testing
of this manual.

224 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

15.12 Appendix K – Percent Saturation Readout

In some special applications, it is desirable to read out in percent saturation rather than concentration. These are usually in non-
aqueous solutions where the normal temperature compensation of the Series UDA2182 Analyzer for the solubility of air/oxygen
in water does not apply. The percent saturation readout disables this solubility part of the temperature compensation. The
readout is 100% when measuring in air or in a solution saturated with air, regardless of the temperature. Thus an air calibration
will always produce approximately a 100% saturation readout. With this readout, salinity should be left at zero since the normal
salinity correction also does not apply to non-aqueous media.
When percent saturation readout is selected, the on-line displays read in percent saturation, however, all the dissolved oxygen
settings in the Analyzer remain in concentration units (ppm or ppb). Therefore, percent saturation alarms, output, etc. Should be
used only if the process temperature is nearly constant.
For example, assume it is desired to have an alarm setpoint at 75% saturation while operating at 20°C. The corresponding
setpoint is the 0.75 x 9.07 = 6.80 ppm.

Table 15-2 Dissolved Oxygen Solubility vs. Temperature

(From Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater)
Sample Solubility
Temperature (ppm, mg/L)
(°C)
0 14.60
1 14.19
2 13.81
3 13.44
4 13.09
5 12.75
6 12.43
7 12.12
8 11.83
9 11.55
10 11.27
11 11.01
12 10.76
13 10.52
14 10.29
15 10.07
16 9.85
17 9.65
18 9.45
19 9.26
20 9.07
21 8.90
22 8.72
23 8.56
24 8.40
25 8.24
26 8.09
27 7.95
28 7.81
29 7.67
30 7.54
31 7.41
32 7.28
33 7.16
34 7.05
35 6.93
36 6.82
37 6.71
38 6.61
39 6.51
40 6.41
41 6.31
42 6.22
43 6.13
44 6.04
45 5.95
46 5.86
47 5.78
48 5.70
49 5.62
50 5.54

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 225

Appendices

15.13 Appendix L – Leak Detection in PPB Applications

Before performing air leak detection, it is necessary to determine that both the probe and
analyzer are working properly. Refer to Probe and Analyzers tests in Section 15.9
1. First, check to see that the probe contains an O-ring. Per the probe directions, an O-
ring must go into a probe that is used in ppb applications. This creates a tight seal
between the probe and flow chamber. MAKE SURE THIS O-RING IS IN THE
PROBE.
2. Unless already in air, open the probe to air for 30 seconds.
3. Put it back into the process again.
4. Allow the DO to drift down to the 20-30 ppb range. The 20-30 ppb range was chosen
because the reading was low enough that the drift was small with respect to the
changes observed for various flow rates but high enough that changes could be
observed.
5. At this range, vary the flow rate from 10 to 100 ml/min. These low flow rates were
selected for two reasons. The first, the tester may only have a 0 - 100 ml/min flow
indicator. The other reason is a leak that exists at this low flow, will cause a change in
the DO reading.
6. If the DO value at 10 ml/min exceeds the DO value at 100 ml/min, a leak is present in
the sampling line.
7. Fixing the leak may require plastic tubing to be replaced with metal tubing, tape to be
put on fittings, and/or fittings at the bottom of the probe to be tightened securely.
8. Now, repeat Steps 2 - 6 until the flow can be changed from >100 ml/min to 10 ml/min
with no change in the DO value.

226 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

15.14 Appendix M – Procedure for Low Level ppb Dissolved Oxygen

Testing
Overview
The purpose of this procedure is two-fold. First, using a controlled environment, new
probes and/or analyzers can be tested to determine if each is performing correctly before
being installed in the field. Second, this procedure can be used to re-test the performance
of an existing analyzer and/or probe.
You may choose to use this set-up for a zero calibration test. However, a zero calibration
test would require, as a minimum, modifications to two of the test parameters. One
modification would require a closed loop water system. The sample water must be
tapped directly from the customer’s process water. The other modification would be the
gas. For zero calibration, a high purity nitrogen gas (very expensive) must be piped into
the process sample. Since Honeywell can neither control the quality of the gas the
customer purchases nor the quality of the process water used, the company will not
guarantee the accuracy of the results of a zero calibration done by this modified method.

Equipment Needed
• One Tank of Oxygen in Nitrogen gas mixture
• One pressure regulator/shutoff valve
• Wash bottle - used to add moisture to the sample gas before the gas reaches the
probe. (Without addition of moisture, the Nitrogen gas would dry out the probe
membrane.)
• One Beaker - used to vent the gas sample
• One Dissolved Oxygen probe - used to make DO measurement
• One Dissolved Oxygen flow through chamber - provide a closed environment
• One Honeywell Model UDA2182 Analyzer - monitors and displays DO value.

Oxygen Measurement Procedure

1. Connect probe and energize the electronics.
2. Allow probe to sit in tap water for 1 hour.
3. Perform an air calibration per the manual instructions.
4. Set-up equipment as shown in Figure 15-7.
5. Install probe into sealed flow chamber and connect to wash bottle piping.
6. Set room temperature to 25°C and sparge water with nitrogen overnight. Reading
should be less than 1 ppb.
7. Remove probe from flow chamber and expose to 25°C air for 2 hours.
8. Perform an air calibration.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 227

Appendices

9. Return probe to flow chamber and resume nitrogen sparging.

10. When analyzer indicates that DO level is below 20 ppb, change gas to 250 ppm O2 in
nitrogen. Run until equilibrated (4-6 hours). After equalization, note barometric
pressure and temperature.
11. Compare reading with calculated value.

To Calculate True Value

*Air Sat. Value at T °C x known gas O2 Value x Barometric Pressure = True Value
20.9% 760 mmHg

Example Calculation
At 25°C using 250 ppm O2 in N2 at 770 mm Hg

True Value = 8.24 x 10-6 x 250 x 10-6 x 770 = 9.986 x 10-9 or 10 ppb
20.9 x 10-2 760
* If the temperature of the process water is not at 25°C, use O2 Solubility Tables in Table
15-2 and the process water temperature to determine the Air Saturated O2 value.

Special Requirements: Honeywell Model 2182

Note 1:Gas Mixture is Oxygen in Nitrogen- use GravametricGases analyzed Universal Dual Analyzer
to +/- 1% of contained gas. Get Certificates of Conformance and Analys is on the
purchased gas.
Note 2:Dual Stage, Ultra high purity, high flow pressure regulator-
non-corrosive surface. Try to get this from the gas supplier to beconsistent with
their recommended setup. Example supplier- Scott Model-18 Series.
Note 3:Glass Gas Washing bottles with fritted disc and beaker. Gas bo ttle should
be filled 3/4 with water. Example supplier- Fisher, Cole Palmer
Note 4:Piping around glass wash bottle should be heavy wall flexible lastic.
p Piping
that goes into beaker should be submerged about 1/2” into beaker of water.
Note 5:All other piping should be rigid polypropylene tubing.
Note 6:All calculations are based on 25 Deg C. Dissolved
Oxygen Probe
Model DL5PPB
Rigid Piping
Note 5
Flow Through
Regulator Chamber
Note 2
#31063336 or
Valve #31063337

Note 1
Oxygen Note 4 Beaker
in Flexible for Venting
Nitrogen Piping Wash Bottle Note 4 1/ 2”
Note 3

Figure 15-7 Suggested ppb Dissolved Oxygen Test Set-up

228 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

15.15 Appendix N – Sample Tap Electrode Mounting

Recommendations
Overview
Many applications tap a sample from a main process stream and, after the flow has
passed through the measurement manifold, it is discharged to a sink or floor drain.

Typical Probe Installation

A typical probe installation will find the probe mounted in a flow chamber or tee
arrangement similar to what is shown in Figure 15-8. Key installation features are
provision for flow rate adjustment, a water trap to assure that the probe remains
immersed if sample flow is turned off and means to prevent a below atmospheric pressure
within the manifold.

AIR
VENT

Air vent prevents vaccuum

in discharge to drain line
avoiding air leaks and
resulting problems.
pH, ORP,
Conductivity
or DO
PROBE

3 - 6" Water trap

keeps probe tip wet
when sample water
is turned off

DRAIN
OPTIONAL 3-WAY
VALVE AND DRAIN
FOR DISSOLVED
OXYGEN INSTALLATIONS

FLOW
METER

FLOW DRAIN

Figure 15-8 Typical Probe Installation

It is desirable for water to exit the manifold 3 to 6 inches above the sensor tip. This will
insure that the sensor remains immersed if sample flow is turned off.
The air vent extension is sized so normal sample flow does not completely fill this tube.
Its purpose is to prevent negative pressure within the manifold. Without this air vent, if
for example the exit stream is discharged to a floor drain four feet below the manifold,

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 229

Appendices

then the pressure at the sensor is four feet water-column below atmospheric pressure.
Any fitting leaks at or beyond the flow adjustment valve will result in air infiltration into
the sample. This entrapped air can result in noisy and unstable measurement. In the case
of a part per billion dissolved oxygen (DO) measurement, the indicated DO value can be
substantially higher than the true value.
When it becomes necessary to discharge the sample stream in a loop higher than the
manifold, then the air vent should be located above the highest point in the loop.

230 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

15.16 Appendix O – Auto Clean and Auto Cal Examples

Automatic Cleaning and Calibration
Overview
Although the Honeywell probe accuracy is unaffected by inert fouling, there are two
conditions where probe cleaning may be required. (These conditions affect all
conventional dissolved oxygen probes as well.)
The first is where the fouling is so thick that the response time of the probe becomes
unacceptably long. The second is where organic fouling is consuming oxygen before it
reaches the surface of the probe.
A feature allowing automatic cleaning at preconfigured times is included in the
UDA2182 analyzer. Cleaning may be initiated with a frequency of every few minutes to
monthly.
Cleaning
Functionally, relays within the analyzer are tripped, allowing withdrawal of the probe
from the sample, turning on a cleaning spray, turning off the spray, and reinserting the
probe into the sample. Execution of automatic cleaning and calibration requires you to
install a drive unit, a solenoid valve, and mounting hardware. See Figure 15-9
Calibration
Similarly, all probes drift with time. Although the Honeywell probe is very stable,
included in the analyzer is a feature that allows withdrawal of the probe into air for
automatic air calibration at user-configured times.
The sequence of calibrations and cleanings are user-configurable.
Low Dissolved Oxygen
One symptom of the need for cleaning is a low dissolved oxygen reading. The UDA2182
dissolved oxygen analyzer can be configured to execute a cleaning cycle if the measured
dissolved oxygen falls below a user-selected value. An alarm can be configured to alert
you if the cleaning fails to restore the dissolved oxygen to a higher level. The alarm will
indicate either a true decrease in dissolved oxygen concentration or unsuccessful
cleaning.

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 231

Appendices

Figure 15-9 Auto Clean Setup

232 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Appendices

Automatic Calibration of ppb Dissolved Oxygen Probe

A typical set – up for automatic calibration in a boiler water sampling system is shown in
Figure 15-10. The solenoid valve and connections should be supplied by others and must
be positively air tight to prevent leakage and erroneous measurements.
The solenoid valve is wired to assigned relay contacts in the UDA2182 analyzer and will
operate at a frequency, and for duration as assigned by the end user.

Figure 15-10 Auto Cal Setup

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 233

Index

15.17 Appendix P – AutoClean and AutoCal Theory and Piping

Overview
Periodic calibration of pH electrodes is necessary for best system performance because
electrode outputs change over time. One-point calibration (standardization) is a zero
adjustment to compensate for electrode drift. Two-point calibration (standardization and
slope adjustment) includes a span adjustment to match the gain of the
Analyzer/Controller to the electrode response. Standardization and slope each depend on
the electrode measuring a reference solution (buffer) of known pH.
The AutoClean and AutoCal features periodically rinse and calibrate pH electrodes
automatically as described in this section. To take advantage of these features you must:
• Select them during I/O setup (Section 6.15)
• Set the clock (Section 6.18), and specify the frequency and duration of the cleaning and
calibration operations. (Section 6.15)
• Configure the system to use automatic buffer recognition. (Section 8.5.2).
•Wire the relays assigned to these operations during system setup to operate the
necessary valves. (Section 7.3).
• Install piping and valves as diagrammed in this section.

AutoClean Sequence and Piping

Rinse sequence
The AutoClean operation occurs at the configured intervals. The sequence is described
below.
1 All alarm action is held at existing levels. The output(s) can be held or be active, depending on
configuration. Even if the outputs are not held, “HOLD ACTIVE” is displayed on the alarm stripe
because alarms are always held.

Also, “AUTOSEQUENCE” is displayed. Pressing the DISPLAY key will call up a special display that
shows how much time is left in the operation.

2 Relay 1 activates 3-way solenoid valve S1 (see Figure 15-11) to direct rinsing fluid to the electrodes
for the configured rinse duration (1 to 1999 seconds). If the measured sample is normally returned
to the process but quantities of rinsing fluid cannot be tolerated there, use an additional 3-way
solenoid valve S4. It is activated simultaneously with S1 to divert the discharge to drain.

3 At the end of the configured rinse time Relay 1 de-activates the solenoid valve S1 (and S4, if used).
After the configured delay period (1 to 1999 seconds) the Analyzer/Controller resumes sampling the
process. (Note that even with S4 for diversion, one system volume of washing fluid will pass to the
process at this point.)

4 The “HOLD” and “AUTOSEQUENCE” messages are cleared.

Note that the operator can make the operation pause using the special AutoClean display.
If the operator does not remove the pause by pressing the PAUSE soft key again, the
Analyzer/Controller will resume normal operation after 20 minutes.

234 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 rinse/cleaning
solution
9782
to process
pH
electrode
S4

to drain
S1

process
sample Items outside this area
provided by user

Figure 15-11 Automatic Electrode Wash Setup

Select valves and fittings with appropriate pressure ratings

Make the process connections as shown in Figure 15-11. Be sure that valves and fittings
(S1) have sufficient pressure ratings to withstand pressure peaks which will occur when
process flow is blocked.
Minimize liquid volume in system
Keep pipe sizes small and couplings close to minimize the liquid volume in the system.
Smaller volumes require less time to rinse.
15.17.1 AutoCal Sequence and Piping
Introduction
AutoCal can include one-point calibration (standardization) to adjust zero to compensate
for electrode drift, or two-point calibration (standardization and slope adjustment) to also
adjust span to match the gain of the Analyzer/Controller to the electrode response.
Standardization and slope each depend on the electrode measuring a reference solution
(buffer) of known pH.
Rinse and one-point calibration sequence
The AutoCal operation automatically occurs at the configured intervals. It always
includes AutoClean rinsing of the pH electrode, in addition to any other AutoClean
sequences that are configured to occur between standardization operations. The sequence
is described below.
1 All alarm action is held at existing levels. The output(s) can be held or be active, depending on
configuration. Even if the outputs are not held, “HOLD ACTIVE” is displayed on the alarm stripe
because alarms are always held.

Also, “AUTOSEQUENCE” is displayed. Pressing the DISPLAY key will call up a special display
that shows how much time is left in the operation

2 In preparation for the calibration, Relay 1 activates 3-way solenoid valve S1 (see Figure 15-12) to
direct rinsing fluid to the electrodes for the configured rinse duration (1 to 1999 seconds). If the
measured sample is normally returned to the process but quantities of rinsing fluid cannot be
tolerated there, use an additional 3-way solenoid valve S4. It is activated simultaneously with S1 to

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 235

Index

divert the discharge to drain.

3 Relay 2 activates solenoid valve S2 for the preset buffer time (1 to 1999 seconds) to direct buffer
solution past the electrodes by gravity.

4 After a stable reading is reached or the set maximum buffer time elapses, the 9782 stores the new
calibration value using automatic buffer recognition. Diagnostics detect excessive instability or
offset, prevent erroneous calibrating and can activate an alarm, depending on configuration. If the
diagnostic fails, an error message is always displayed on the alarm stripe (see Section 12).

If an unacceptable value is obtained, it will be rejected and the previous value will be retained for
uninterrupted operation.

5 All valves are deactivated to resume measurement of the sample.

6 A delay period (1 to 1999 seconds) can be configured to permit the measurement to stabilize on the
process sample. At the end of the delay period normal alarm, control and output operation
resumes. The “HOLD” and “AUTOSEQUENCE” messages are cleared.

Items outside this area

provided by user
buffer
solution
9782
to process
pH
electrode S4

to drain
S2

process
sample rinse water
S1

Figure 15-12 Rinse and One-Point Calibration

Rinse and two-point calibration sequence
With this function, rinse and one-point standardization operations are performed as
described previously according to the configured schedule. If two-point calibration is to
be performed periodically, then after the configured number of standardization
operations, Steps 4a and 4b shown below are also performed (before Step 5 above) to
make the slope adjustment.
4a Relay 3 activates solenoid valve S3 for the configured buffer time to direct the second buffer flow to
the electrodes.

4b After stability is reached or the set maximum buffer time elapses, the instrument calculates and
stores a new slope value using automatic buffer recognition. Diagnostics detect excessive
instability or offset, prevent erroneous calibrating and can activate an alarm, depending on
configuration. If the diagnostic fails, an error message is always displayed on the alarm stripe (see
Section 9).

If an unacceptable value is obtained, it will be rejected and the previous value will be retained for
uninterrupted operation.

236 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Select piping and valves based on chemical resistance and pressure ratings
Make the process connections as shown in Figure 15-12 or Figure 15-13. Materials and
components should be carefully selected for chemical resistance to process and buffer
solutions at anticipated temperatures. Be sure that valves and fittings have sufficient
pressure ratings to withstand pressure peaks which will occur when process flow is
blocked.
Minimize liquid volume in system
Keep pipe sizes small and couplings close to minimize the liquid volume in the system.
Smaller volumes require less buffer solution and less time to rinse and to calibrate.

Items outside this area

provided by user

S3
buffer buffer
solution 1 solution 2
9782

to process
pH
electrode S4

S2 to drain

process
sample rinse water
S1

Two-Point Calibration
Alarms Held
Relay 1 Activated
Rinse Duration
Standardize Duration, Relay 2 Activated
Slope Duration, Relay 3 Activated
(Same Period as Standardize)
Resume Delay Time (seconds)
Normal Operation
1.709"

TIME
Interval Between
Cleaning/Calibration
(days or hours)
TM
Two-Point AutoCal Operation*
* One-point AutoCal and AutoClean operations omit
steps using Relay 3 and Relays 2 & 3, respectively.

Figure 15-13 Two-Point AutoCal Operation

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 237

Index

238 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

 Index
3-mode control .........................................................91 Auto Cycle Fail Messages......................................191
Auto Cycle Start Source .................................100, 102
A Auto Cycling .............................................44, 100, 102
Absolute Value .........................................................85 Auto Cycling Configuration.......................................99
Accessing Alarms Menu...........................................81 Auto Permit ..............................................................95
Accessing Auto Cycle Menu.............................99, 100 Auto range functions ................................................80
Accessing Auxiliary Menu ........................................89 Automatic buffer recognition.......................................3
Accessing Communication Menu ...................104, 105 Automatic Buffer recognition ..........................138, 140
Accessing Control Menu ..........................................93 Automatic Calibration of ppb Dissolved Oxygen Probe
Accessing Inputs Menu ............................................62 ...........................................................................230
Accessing Logic Menu .............................................86 Aux Values ...............................................................43
Accessing Maintenance Menu ...............................107 Auxiliary Configuration .............................................88
Accessing Math Menu..............................................84
Accessing Monitors Menu ........................................82 B
Accessing Outputs Menu .........................................73 Bargraphs Overview.................................................23
Accessing Relays Menu ...........................................75 Basic Configuration Procedure.................................55
Accessing the Main Calibration Menu and sub-menus Bias ........................................................63, 65, 71, 95
................................................... 135, 176, 183, 186 Bias Constant.........................................63, 65, 70, 71
Accessing the Main Menu ........................................52 Bias Scan ...............................................................169
Accessing the terminals .........................................115 Block Diagram..........................................................51
Accessories............................................................194 Breakpoints ..............................................................88
Accutune ..................................................................96 Buffer Span Too Low .............................................191
Air Calibration.........................................................163 Buffer Span Too Low .............................................190
Air Calibration Method............................................164 Buffering Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes ......142
Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Type...........................................98
Alarm Conditions....................................................189 C
Alarm Hysteresis ......................................................98 Cal Factor ........................................................67, 154
Alarm n is active.....................................................189 Cal Factor Overrange.............................................190
Alarm Status.............................................................41 Cal Factor Underrange...........................................190
Alarm types ........................................................81, 82 Calc Values ..............................................................44
Alarm/ Control Relays ................................................6 Calibrating the Percent Slope.................................139
Alarm/Control Settings ...............................................6 Calibration Diagnostics...........................................190
Alarms Configuration................................................80 Calibration History..................................................186
Amine pH ...............................................................109 Calibration Menu ....................................................135
Ammonia pH ..........................................................109 Calibration Trim......................................136, 156, 159
Analog and Digital Signal Sources ...........................57 Case Dimensions .......................................................7
Analog Output ............................................................5 Case Material .............................................................5
analog outputs........................................................117 Cation Calc.............................................................109
Analog Signal Sources .............................................58 Cation Calc Display..................................................37
Analyzer Overview ...................................................21 Cation pH Calibration .............................................160
AND .........................................................................87 Cations.....................................................................37
Appendices ............................................................196 CE Conformity (Europe) .............................................7
Atmospheric pressure compensation .......................71 Cell Constant............................................................67
Auto Buffer Recognition .............................................6 Chrome Waste Treatment ......................................205
Auto Clean and Auto Cal Examples .......................228 Clear Cal History ....................................................109
Auto Cycle 1 Calibration Point 1...............................60 Clear Calibration History ........................................187
Auto Cycle 1 Calibration Point 2...............................60 Clear Event History ..........................................46, 109
Auto Cycle 1 Failure .................................................60 Clock ......................................................................110
Auto Cycle 1 Probe Extraction .................................60 CO2 ........................................................................109
Auto Cycle 1 Probe Rinse ........................................60 CO2 by Degassed Conductivity ................................39
Auto Cycle 2 Calibration Point 1...............................60 Comm Status ...........................................................43
Auto Cycle 2 Calibration Point 2...............................60 Communication Configuration ........................104, 105
Auto Cycle 2 Failure .................................................60 Communications Card..............................................49
Auto Cycle 2 Probe Extraction .................................60 Communications Card (Optional) ...............................2
Auto Cycle 2 Probe Rinse ........................................60 Computed Variables...................................................3
Auto Cycle Displays .................................................28 Concentration...........................................................70
Auto Cycle Fail .........................................................32 Cond Units Type ....................................................108

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 239

Index

Conditional Sequencer Steps...................................32 F

Conductivity......................................................66, 136
Failsafe ..................................................63, 65, 70, 72
Conductivity Calibration..................................137, 154
Failsafe Output Value...............................................94
Conductivity Compensations......................................6
Features.....................................................................3
Conductivity of Potassium Chloride Solutions at 25 °C
Feed Forward Gain ..................................................95
...........................................................................157
Feedforward Source.................................................95
Conductivity Wiring Diagrams ................................128
Filter Time ........................................63, 65, 70, 72, 85
Configuration............................................................50
Frequency proportional output .................................77
Configuration Procedure ..........................................54
Frequency Proportional Output ................................76
Conform to code.....................................................114
Function Generator ..................................................89
Contrast Adjustment.................................................23
Function Generators ................................................88
Control Action...........................................................94
Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression .................................96
Control Algorithm .....................................................94
Control Loop/Outputs .................................................6 G
Current outputs ......................................................176 Gain ...................................................................85, 96
Cyanide Waste Treatment......................................201 Gain or Prop Band 2 ................................................97
Cycle Interval ...........................................30, 100, 102 General Rules for Editing .........................................54
Cycle Start Src .........................................................30 General Wiring Practices..................................16, 113
Cycle Time .............................................76, 77, 78, 79 Glass Meredian External Preamp ..........................124
D Glass Meredian II ...................................................120
Degassed CO2 .........................................................38 H
Derivative (D) ...........................................................91 Header ...................................................................109
DHCP.......................................................................49 High Monitor.............................................................83
Diagnostic/Failsafe Outputs .......................................4 High Noise Immunity ..................................................4
Digital Output Relay ...........................................75, 76 Hold Active ...............................................................30
Digital Signal Source ..........................................58, 88 HOLD ACTIVE .......................................................189
Digital Signal Sources ..............................................59 Hold of Analog Inputs..............................................60
Digital Source...........................................................76 HPW7000.......................................................122, 123
Direct pH ..................................................................62 Hysteresis ..........................................................81, 82
Direct pH/ORP Wiring Diagrams ............................118
Discussion on Chemical Interferences on Measured I, J
DO Currents .......................................................220 Immunity compliance..............................................113
Display .......................................................................5 Index ......................................................................236
Display Ranges ..........................................................5 Infrared communications ..........................................48
Display Test ...........................................................110 Infrared Communications ...........................................2
Displays..............................................................20, 23 Input 1 Fault .............................................................59
Dissolved Oxygen ................................................3, 70 Input 2 Fault .............................................................59
Dissolved Oxygen Calibration ................................163 INPUT BOARD n FAULT .......................................189
Dissolved Oxygen Measurement................................6 Input Calibration .....................................................134
Dissolved Oxygen Wiring Diagrams .......................129 Input Displays...........................................................25
DO Probe and Analyzer Tests................................216 Input Errors ............................................................189
DUPA .......................................................................94 Input Fault ..............................................................191
DUPB .......................................................................94 INPUT n PROBE OUT OF SOLUTION ..................189
Durafet II ................................................................119 INPUT n TEMP OPEN ...........................................189
Durafet II Cap Adapter ...........................................126 Input Status ..............................................................42
Durafet II External Preamp.....................................125 Inputs .........................................................................1
Durafet III ...............................................................118 Inputs and Outputs.................................................115
Durafet III Cap Adapter ..........................................127 Inputs and Outputs Wiring......................................112
E Inputs Configuration .................................................62
Insert Wait Src........................................................100
Enclosure rating .........................................................7 Installation Ratings.....................................................7
Entering Values for Lead Resistance Compensation installing Input and Output wiring ...........................117
(Wide Range Only).....................................197, 199 Installing Power Wiring.............................................17
Ethernet and Communications ...............................193 Integral (I).................................................................91
Ethernet port ............................................................49 Invert ................................................76, 77, 78, 79, 87
Ethernet TCP/IP Communications Interface...............7
Event History............................................................45 K
Extract Wait Src .....................................................100 Key Navigation .........................................................22
Keypad .......................................................................5
Keypad Test ...........................................................110

240 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

L Output 3 Fault ..........................................................59
Output Bargraphs.....................................................24
Label ......................................................................109
Output Calibration ..................................................176
Language ...............................................................107
Output Errors..........................................................189
LATCH .....................................................................87
Output High Limit .....................................................93
Leak Detection in PPB Applications .......................223
Output High Limit Value ...........................................93
Linear .......................................................................85
Output Level...........................................................111
Local Setpoint Permit ...............................................95
Output Levels ...........................................................42
Log ...........................................................................85
Output Low Limit ......................................................93
Logic Configuration ..................................................86
Output Low Limit Value ............................................93
Logic Input A and B Source......................................87
OUTPUT n OPEN ..................................................189
Logic Status .............................................................42
Outputs ......................................................................2
Logic Type................................................................87
Outputs Configuration ..............................................73
Low Level ppb Dissolved Oxygen Testing..............224
Outputs Wiring .......................................................132
Low Monitor..............................................................83
Overview ....................................................................1
M P, Q
mA Limit High...........................................................73
Panel Mounting Dimensions.....................................11
mA Range High........................................................73
Panel Mounting Procedure.......................................11
mA Range Low.........................................................73
Parameters Affecting Dissolved Oxygen
Main Setup Menu .....................................................52
Measurement .....................................................219
Mains Freq .............................................................107
Part Numbers .........................................................195
Maintenance Configuration ....................................107
Passwor Protection ....................................................4
Manual Permit ..........................................................95
Password ...............................................................107
Manual Select ..........................................................94
Pct Range High ............................................76, 77, 78
Math Configuration...................................................84
Pct Range Low.............................................76, 77, 78
Math Type ................................................................85
Percent Saturation Readout ...................................222
Math Values .............................................................43
pH Amine pH............................................................38
Maximum wire size.................................................114
pH Ammonia ............................................................38
Measured Conductivity and Resistivity.......................3
PH Calibration ........................................................138
Measured pH..............................................................3
pH Durafet..........................................................62, 64
Measurement Errors ..............................................189
pH Glass ............................................................62, 64
Menu Indicators..................................................23, 52
pH HPW ...................................................................62
Modbus Communications.........................................49
pH Input from External Preamplifier/Cap Adapter
Monitor .....................................................................82
Wiring Diagrams.................................................124
Monitor 1, 2, 3, 4 ......................................................82
pH Offset................................................................162
Monitor Status ..........................................................42
pH Offset adjustment .............................................138
Monitor Type ............................................................82
pH ORP....................................................................62
Monitors Configuration .............................................82
pH Preamp input card ..............................................64
Mounting ..........................................................7, 9, 10
pH/ORP Calibration................................................137
N PH/ORP Calibration ...............................................136
pH/ORP/DO ...........................................................190
Noise Testing, Dissolved Oxygen Application ........215
Pharm Tmr Mins.......................................................70
O Pharma Display........................................................33
Off Time ...................................................................76 Pharma Fail Messages ..........................................192
Offset .......................................................................85 Pharma Fail Signal...................................................36
Offset Overrange....................................................191 PHARMA n PH OVERRANGE ...............................192
Offset Underrange..................................................191 PHARMA n PH UNDERRANGE ............................192
On / Off control relay ................................................76 PHARMA n PV LIMIT WARN.................................192
On / Off output ...................................................75, 78 PHARMA n PV OVERLIMIT...................................192
On Delay ......................................................81, 82, 87 PHARMA n TEMP OVERRANGE ..........................192
On Time .................................................76, 77, 78, 79 PHARMA n TEMP UNDERRANGE .......................192
Online Functions ......................................................24 PHARMA n TIMER ACTIVE...................................192
Operating Conditions .................................................5 Pharma PV High ......................................................70
Operating the Analyzer.............................................20 Pharma PV Low .......................................................70
Option Card............................................................133 Pharma Type............................................................70
OR............................................................................87 Pharmacopoeia 1 Failure .........................................60
ORP ...........................................................62, 64, 121 Pharmacopoeia 1 Warning.......................................60
ORP Calibration Using Reference Solution............148 Pharmacopoeia 2 Failure .........................................60
ORP Calibration Using Voltage Input .....................151 Pharmacopoeia 2 Warning.......................................60
Output 1 Fault ..........................................................59 PID A........................................................................94
Output 2 Fault ..........................................................59 PID Alarm Status......................................................41

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 241

Index

PID Alarms ...............................................................97 R

PID B........................................................................94
Range High ..............................................................73
PID Configuration.....................................................93
Range Low ...............................................................73
PID Control.............................................................107
Rate 2 ......................................................................97
PID Control 1 Alarm 1 ..............................................60
RATE action .............................................................96
PID Control 1 Alarm 2 ..............................................60
Ratio.........................................................................94
PID Control 2 Alarm 1 ..............................................60
Readings Unstable.................................................191
PID Control 2 Alarm 2 ..............................................60
READINGS UNSTABLE ........................................190
PID Control Configuration ........................................91
Rear Panel Support Plate Dimensions .....................12
PID Display Editing ..................................................27
Recommended wire size ..........................................17
PID Displays.............................................................26
Relay outputs .........................................................117
PID Tuning ...............................................................96
Relay state .............................................................111
Pipe Mounting ..........................................................13
Relay States.............................................................42
Power Mode .............................................................94
Relay Types .............................................................76
Power Out ................................................................94
Relays ........................................................................2
Power Requirements..................................................6
Relays Configuration ................................................75
Power Supply/Analog Output/Relay Output Card...132
Remote Setpoint Permit ...........................................95
Power Wiring............................................................15
Remote Setpoint Select ...........................................95
Power Wiring Considerations ...................................17
Remote Setpoint Source ..........................................94
Preamplifier Input Option............................................6
Repeat per minute....................................................96
Precision Check Resistor ...............................196, 213
Replacement Parts List ..........................................194
Pressure Calibration...............................................163
RESET (Integral Time).............................................97
Pressure Calibration Method..................................168
Reset 2.....................................................................97
Pressure Type..........................................................71
Resetting Calibration Trim......................................159
Probe Bias Scan ....................................................171
Resetting ORP Offset.............................................153
Probe Calibration Diagnostics ................................190
Resetting Output 1 Offsets.....................................181
Probe Current Too High .........................................190
Resetting pH Offset................................................162
Probe Current Too Low..........................................191
Resetting pH Offset and (Standardization) pH Slope
Probe Current Too Low..........................................190
...........................................................................147
Probe Extract Timeout ...........................................191
Resetting Pressure Offset or Bias Volts .................174
Probe Insert Timeout..............................................191
Resetting temperature offset ..................................185
Probe Pv N Fault....................................................189
resume delay..........................................................102
Probe Temp N Fault...............................................189
Resume Dly Mins .....................................................30
Probe Transit............................................................30
Rinse Cycle Cnt .......................................................30
Procedure for Calibrating Analyzer Outputs ...........178
Rinse Mins ...............................................................30
Procedure for Calibrating the Temperature Inputs 183,
RS422/RS485 Modbus RTU Slave Communications
186
Interface .................................................................6
Process Instrument Explorer Software .....................47
Process Variable Source....................................81, 93 S
Process Variable Values ..........................................24
Safety Compliance .....................................................7
Proportional (P) ........................................................91
Safety precaution .............................................16, 113
Proportional Band (PB) ............................................96
Salinity ppt................................................................71
PTS OVERRANGE ................................................190
Salinity Type.............................................................71
PTS UNDERRANGE..............................................190
Sample Calibration.................................................163
Pulse Output ................................................75, 76, 79
Sample Calibration Method ....................................166
PV Bias ....................................................................70
Sample Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes........145
PV High....................................................93, 100, 102
Sample Method of Calibrating Cation pH ...............160
PV Low.....................................................93, 100, 102
Sample Tap Electrode Mounting Recommendations
PV n INPUT OPEN ................................................189
...........................................................................226
PV n OVERRANGE ...............................................189
Saturation.................................................................70
PV n UNDERRANGE.............................................189
Sequencer Steps for Auto Cycle ........................32, 35
PV Source ..........................................................76, 77
Serial port.................................................................49
PV Temperature.......................................................24
Setpoint at Power up ................................................94
PV Type .................................................62, 64, 67, 70
Setpoint High Limit Value .........................................93
Setpoint Low Limit Value..........................................93
Setpoint Value..........................................................81
Setup Group Overview.............................................52
Shielded wiring for locations with interference........114
Signal Sources .........................................................57
Single Displays.........................................................25
Slew Time ................................................................73

242 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

Slope adjustments..................................................138 Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode with
Slope Overrange ....................................................191 Cap Adapter .......................................................126
Slope Underrange ..................................................191 Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode with
Software version number .......................................107 External Preamplifier ..........................................125
Solu Temp Coeff ................................................63, 65 Terminal Designations for Durafet III Electrode......118
Solu Temp Comp .........................................63, 64, 69 Terminal Designations for Durafet III Electrode with
Solution Temp Too High ........................................190 Cap Adapter .......................................................127
Solution Temp Too Low .........................................190 Terminal Designations for HPW7000 System 122, 123
Solution Unstable ...................................................191 Terminal Designations for Meredian Electrode with
Solution Unstable ...................................................190 External Preamplifier ..........................................124
Source......................................................................73 Terminal Designations for Meredian II Electrode ...120
SP High Limit ...........................................................93 Terminal Designations for Option Board ................133
SP Low Limit ............................................................93 Terminal Designations for ORP..............................121
SP Source ....................................................81, 82, 85 Terminal Designations for Power, Analog Output, and
Specific and Cation Conductivity Setup....................38 Relay Output ......................................................132
Specifications .............................................................5 Time proportional output ..............................42, 75, 76
Sqr Root ...................................................................85 Time Proportional Output Relay ...............................76
Square Root .............................................................85 Tune Set 2 ...............................................................97
Standard and solution temperature compensation .....3 Two Input Display.....................................................25
Standard pH Buffer Values for Automatic Buffer Two-cell Applications..............................................209
Recognition ........................................................139
standardization.......................................................138 U
Starting/Stopping the Auto Cycle .............................31 Unit Reset ..............................................................108
Status Displays ........................................................41 Unpacking ..................................................................9
Status Messages......................................................24 Unpacking and Preparing.........................................10
Switch.......................................................................89 Upper range limit defaults ........................................66
Switch selections......................................................88 User interface.............................................................1
Symbol Definitions .................................................... iv
System Status Messages.......................................189 V
Variables ..................................................................43
T Voltage outputs ......................................................176
Tag Name ................................................................24
Tag Names ............................................................109 W, X, Y, Z
TDS conversion factor....................................154, 155 Wall Mounting Dimensions.......................................14
TDS Factor...............................................................68 Watertight corrosion-resistant case............................4
TEMP n OVERRANGE ..........................................189 Web pages ...............................................................49
TEMP n UNDERRANGE........................................189 Weight........................................................................7
Temp Type .............................................62, 64, 68, 71 Wire Len Feet...........................................................69
Temp Units.................................................63, 64, 109 Wire Len Meters.......................................................69
Temperature Compensation.......................................6 Wire Length............................................................108
Temperature Input Calibration................................183 wire size .................................................................108
Terminal Designations for Conductivity ..................128 Wire Size AWG ........................................................69
Terminal Designations for Dissolved Oxygen.........129 Wire Size Sq mm .....................................................70
Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode.......119 Wireless Interface ......................................................6
Wiring for immunity compliance ...............................16
Wiring terminals and board location .......................116

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 243

Index

244 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual January 2009

January 2009 UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual 245
Sales and Service
For application assistance, current specifications, pricing, or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor, contact one
of the offices below.
ASIA PACIFIC Malaysia Bulgaria Slovak Republic AFRICA
Control Products Honeywell Engineering Honeywell EOOD Honeywell s.r.o. Mediterranean & African
Asia Pacific Headquarters Sdn Bhd Phone: +(359) 2 40 20 900 Phone: +421-2-58247 410 Distributors
Phone: +(65) 6355-2828 Phone: +(60-3) 7950- FAX: +(359) 2 40 20 990 FAX: +421-2-58247 415 Honeywell SpA
Fax: +(65) 6445-3033 4776 Phone: +39 (02) 250 10
Fax: +(60-3) 7958-8922 Czech Republic Spain 604
Asia Pacific Global Honeywell spol. s.r.o. Honeywell S.A. FAX: +39 (02) 250 10 659
New Zealand Phone: +420 242 442 232 Phone: +34 (0)91313 61 00
Technical Support Honeywell Limited FAX: +420 242 442 131 FAX: +34 (0)91313 61 30 South Africa (Republic
Field Instruments Phone: +(64-9) 623-5052 of)
Phone: +65 6580 3156 Fax: +(64-9) 623-5060 Denmark Sweden and sub saharan
Fax: +65 6445-3033 Toll Free (0800) 202-088 Honeywell A/S Honeywell AB Honeywell Southern
Process Instruments Phone: +(45) 39 55 55 55 Phone: +(46) 8 775 55 00 Africa
Phone: (603) 76950 4777 Philippines FAX: +(45) 39 55 55 58 FAX: +(46) 8 775 56 00 Honeywell S.A. Pty. Ltd.
Fax: (603) 7958 8922 Honeywell Systems Phone: +27 11 6958000
(Philippines) Inc. Finland Switzerland FAX +27 118051504
Australia Phone: +(63-2) 633-2830- Honeywell OY Honeywell AG
Honeywell Limited 31/ Phone: +358 (0)20752 Phone: +41 18552448
Phone: +(61) 7-3846 1255 636 1661-62 2753 FAX: +(41) 1 855 24 45
NORTH AMERICA
FAX: +(61) 7-3840 6481 Canada
Fax: +(63-2) 638-4013 FAX: +358 (0) 20752 2751 Honeywell LTD
Toll Free 1300-36-39-36 Turkey
Toll Free Fax: Phone: 1-800-737-3360
Singapore France Honeywell Turkey A.S. FAX: 1-800-565-4130
1300-36-04-70 Honeywell Pte Ltd. Honeywell SA Phone: +90 216 578 71 00
Phone: +(65) 6580 3278 Phone: +33 (0)1 60198075 FAX: +90 216 575 66 35 USA
China – PRC - Beijing Fax: +(65) 6445-3033 FAX: +33 (0)1 60198201
Honeywell China Inc. Honeywell Process
Ukraine Solutions,
Phone: +(86-10) 8458- South Korea Germany Honeywell
3280 Phone: 1-800-343-0228
Honeywell Korea Co Ltd Honeywell AG Tel: +380-44-201 44 74 FAX: 1-717-771-8251
Fax: +(86-10) 8458-4650 Phone: +(822) 799 6315 Phone: +49 (69)8064-299 Fax: +380-44-201-44-75 Email:sc-cp-
Fax: +(822) 792 9015 FAX: +49 (69)806497336 appssales@
China – PRC - Shanghai United Kingdom
Honeywell China Inc. [Link]
Thailand Hungary Honeywell Control Systems
Phone: (86-21) 5257-4568 Honeywell Systems Honeywell Kft. Ltd.
Fax: (86-21) 6237-2826 (Thailand) Ltd. Phone: +36-1-451 4300 Phone: +44 (0)1344 LATIN AMERICA
Phone: +(662) 693-3099 FAX: +36-1-451 4343 655251 Argentina
China – PRC - Chengdu FAX: +(662) 693-3089 FAX: +44 (0) 1344 655554 Honeywell S.A.I.C.
Honeywell China Inc. Italy Phone: +(54-11) 4383-
Phone: +(86-28) 8678- Taiwan R.O.C. Honeywell S.p.A. 3637
6348 Honeywell Taiwan Ltd. Phone:+390292146307 MIDDLE EAST FAX: +(54-11) 4325-6470
Fax: +(86-28) 8678-7061 Phone: +(886-2) 2245- FAX: +39 0292146377 Abu Dhabi U A E
1000 Middle East Headquarters Brazil
China – PRC - Xi’an FAX: +(886-2) 2245-3241 The Netherlands Honeywell Middle East Ltd. Honeywell do Brasil & Cia
Honeywell China Ltd - Honeywell B.V. Phone: +971 2 4041246 Phone: +(55-11) 7266-
Xi’an. SE Asia Countries Phone: +31 (0) 20 FAX: +971 2 4432536 1900
Phone: +(86-29) 8833- see Honeywell Pte Ltd 5656200 FAX: +(55-11) 7266-1905
7490 (Singapore) FAX: +31 (0) 20 5656210 Sultanate of Oman
Fax: +(86-29) 8833-7489 for: Pakistan, Cambodia, Honeywell & Co Oman LLC Chile
Guam, Laos, Myanmar, Norway Phone: +968 24 701153/ Honeywell Chile, S.A.
China – PRC - Shenzhen- Vietnam, East Timor Honeywell A/S Ext.33 Phone: +(56-2) 233-0688
Honeywell China Inc. Phone: (45) 39 55 55 55 FAX +968 24 787351 FAX: +(56-2) 231-6679
Phone: +(86) 755-2518- SE Asia Countries
1226 see Honeywell Poland Saudia Arabia Mexico
Fax: +(86) 755-2518-1221 Automation Honeywell Sp. zo.o Honeywell Turki Arabia Ltd Honeywell S.A. de C.V.
India Ltd for: Phone: +48-22-6060900 Jubail Office Phone: +(52) 55 5259-
Indonesia Bangladesh FAX: +48-22-6060901 Phone: +966-3-341-0140 1966
PT Honeywell Indonesia Nepal Fax: +966-3-341-0216 FAX: +(52) 55 5570-2985
Phone: +(62) 21-535-8833 Sri Lanka Portugal Honeywell - ATCO
FAX: +(62) 21-5367 1008 Honeywell Portugal Lda Dammam Office Puerto Rico
Phone: +351 21 424 5000 Phone: 0096638304584 Honeywell Inc.
India Automation India Ltd. EUROPE FAX: +351 21 424 50 99 Fax: 0096638338059 Phone: +(809) 792-7075
Honeywell Ltd. Austria FAX: +(809) 792-0053
Phone:+(91) 5603-9400 Honeywell Austria GmbH Kuwait
Phone: +43 (316)400123 Romania
Fax: +(91) 5603-9600 Honeywell Bucharest Honeywell Kuwait KSC Trinidad
FAX: +43 (316)40017 Phone: +965 242 1327 to Honeywell Inc.
Phone: +40 (0) 21
Japan 2316437 30 Phone: +(868) 624-3964
Honeywell Inc. Belgium Fax: +965 242 8315 FAX: +(868) 624-3969
Honeywell SA/NV FAX: +40 (0) 21 2316439
Phone: +(81) 3 6730 7150 And
Fax: +(81) 3 6730 7228 Phone: +32 (0) 2 728 24 Phone: +965 326 Venezuela
07 Russian Federation (RF),
ZAO "Honeywell" 2934/1821Fax: +965 326 Honeywell CA
FAX: +32 (0) 2 728 22 45 1714 Phone: +(58-2) 238-0211
Phone: +7 (095) 796 98 00
FAX: +7 (495) 797 99 64 FAX: +(58-2) 238-3391

Honeywell Process Solutions

Honeywell 70-82-25-119 Rev.5
2500 W. Union Hill Drive January 2009
Phoenix, Arizona 85027 ©2009 Honeywell International Inc.
[Link]/ps